Design Gtstrudl

GT STRUDL
Integrated CAE System for

Structural Engineering Analysis and Design
Design
GT STRUDL User Guide
Revision 5, April 2009

Computer Aided Structural Engineering Center
School of Civil and Environmental Engineering
Georgia Institute of Technology
Atlanta, Georgia 30332-0355
U.S.A.
Telephone:
+1-404-8942260
FAX:
+1-404-8948014
E-Mail: casec@ce.gatech.edu
Preface
GTSTRUDL User Guide: Design
Revision History
Revision No.
Date Released
Description
N/A
8/96
First Edition describing steel and reinforced

concrete frame design.
10/97
Correction to calculation of G-factor for steel

design K-factor calculations, corrections to
steel and reinforced concrete design
discussions, update of LRFD1 to LRFD2 steel
design code, removal of quotations from
PARAMETER values, and typographical error
corrections.
6/99
Typographical error corrections, minor

editorial corrections, and new steel tables in
Appendix E.
1/05
A few command updates, typographical error

corrections, and minor editorial corrections.
12/06
No changes have been made to this

document other than the Revision Number,
and release and copyright dates.
4/09
No changes have been made to this

document other than the Revision Number,
and release and copyright dates.
- ii -
Preface
Notices
This GTSTRUDL User Guide: Design, Revision 5, is applicable to:
GTSTRUDL Version 30 and higher numbered versions for use on PCs under the Windows
Vista/XP/2000/NT operating systems. The GTSTRUDL computer program is proprietary to,
and a trade secret of, the Georgia Tech Research Corporation, Atlanta, Georgia, U.S.A.
Disclaimer
The Georgia Tech Research Corporation (GTRC) and the Georgia Institute of Technology
make no representation or warranty expressed or implied as to the adequacy of this
documentation or the software described herein. In no event shall the Georgia Tech Research
Corporation, or the Georgia Institute of Technology, their employees, their contractors, or the
authors of this documentation be liable for special, direct, indirect, or consequential damages,
losses, costs, charges, claims, demands, or claim for lost profits, fees, or expenses of any
nature or kind.
Restricted Rights Legend

Any use, duplication, or disclosure of this software by or for the United States Government
shall be restricted to the terms of a license agreement in accordance with the clause at DFARS
227.7202-3 (June 2005).
This material may be reproduced by or for the United States Government pursuant to the
copyright license under the clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, September 1989.
Copyright 1997 to 2009
by
Georgia Tech Research Corporation
Atlanta, Georgia 30332-0355 U.S.A.
All Rights Reserved
Printed in United States of America
GTSTRUDL is a registered service mark of the Georgia Tech Research Corporation, Atlanta,
Georgia, U.S.A.
Windows Vista , Windows XP , Windows 2000 , and Windows NT are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
- iii -
Preface
Forward
The development of GTSTRUDL began in September 1975 by the School of Civil
Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, Georgia U.S.A. Since then, over 385 manyears have been invested in the continuous research, development, maintenance, validation,
education, and technical support activities in connection with GTSTRUDL. Today, GTSTRUDL is
fully supported by the Computer Aided Structural Engineering Center ("CASE Center"), School of
Civil and Environmental Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, Georgia U.S.A., and
is licensed worldwide through the Georgia Tech Research Corporation.
The CASE Center is committed to continually improving its position of leadership in the
research and development of structural engineering analysis and design software, and to serving
as a technological pipeline through which results of research and development flow from Georgia
Tech to industry, government, and educational institutions in a form which sets the highest
standards of quality, performance, and value.
- iv -
Preface
Table of Contents
CHAPTER
PAGE
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISCLAIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restricted Rights Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
iii
iii
iii
iv
v
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1- 1
User Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differences Between Steel and Reinforced Concrete Design Procedures in
GTSTRUDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format of the Descriptions of Commands in This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subset of GTSTRUDL Commands Ordered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1- 1
1- 1
1- 2
1- 2
STEEL DESIGN COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2- 3
2- 7
2-13
2-18
2-22
2-29
2-34
2-41
2-45
2-51
2-58
2-60
2-61
2-62
2-63
2-64
Introduction to Steel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PARAMETERS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective Length Factor (KY and KZ) Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COLUMN LINE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TAKE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUMMARIZE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEEL TAKEOFF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT Commands for Steel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.1 PRINT PARAMETER VALUES Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.2 PRINT CONSTRAINT CONDITIONS Command . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.3 PRINT DESIGN DATA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.4 PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-v-
Preface
2.13
2.14
GTTABLE: Displaying and Creating Tables of Steel Rolled Shapes . . . .

2.13.1 GTTABLE: Displaying the Names of Existing Tables
..................................................
2.13.2 GTTABLE: Displaying the Contents of an Existing
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.3 GTTABLE: Creating a New Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Batch Mode of Execution of GTTABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TUTORIAL: Batch Execution of GTTABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.4 GTTABLE: Creating a New Table From an Existing
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.5 GTTABLE: How New Tables are Processed by
GTSTRUDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Design Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1 - Steel Design by the 1989 AISC ASD Steel Design Code . . .
Example 2 - Steel Design by the 1993 AISC LRFD, Second
Edition, Steel Design Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-65
2-66
2-68
2-71
2-71
2-75
2-87
2-89
2-90
2-91
2-97
REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3- 1
3.1
3.2
3.3
Introduction to Reinforced Concrete Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reinforced Concrete Design Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Reinforced Concrete Design Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1
MATERIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE Command . . . . . . . .
3.3.2
METHOD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3
CONSTANTS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4
MEMBER DIMENSIONS (PRISMATIC) Command . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5
MEMBER DIMENSIONS VARIABLE Command . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.6
GIRDER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Orthogonal Buildings Modeling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1
GRID DEFINITION Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2
GRID MEMBER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3
FLOOR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4
WALL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5
END OF DEFINITION Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.6
FACE OF SUPPORT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3- 3
3- 4
3- 5
3- 6
3- 7
3-12
3-21
3-25
3-27
3-30
3-31
3-33
3-39
3-43
3-45
3-48
Proportioning Reinforced Concrete Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.1
DESIGN DATA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2
SLAB SUPPORTS Command for Two-Way Slabs . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3
JOINT DETAILS Command for Two-Way Slabs . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4
MEMBER SIMILARITIES Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.5
SEGMENT Command for Two-Way Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.6
PROPORTION MEMBER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.7
DETAIL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.8
ANALYZE and DESIGN Command for One-Way
Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-50
3-51
3-69
3-72
3-74
3-77
3-79
3-81
3.4
3.5
- vi -
3-87
Preface
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
PRINT REINFORCEMENT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

QUANTITY TAKEOFF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interpretation of Reinforced Concrete Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.1
Beam Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2
Column Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDELTA Analysis Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.1
SLENDERNESS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.2
PDELTA LOADING Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.3
PDELTA ANALYSIS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN LOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinforced Concrete Design Example by the ACI318-89 Design
Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-91
3-92
3-93
3-93
3-100
3-102
3-103
3-105
3-106
3-107
3-109
APPENDICES
A
B
C
E
F
Subset of GTSTRUDL Steel and Reinforced Concrete Design Commands

Ordered by Functional Area, and Ordered by Processing Requirements
in Each Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordered by Functional Area, and Ordered by Command in Each Area . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Design Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.1 ASD9 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2 LRFD2 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3 BS449 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4 BS5950 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.5 TOWER2 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.6 NF83 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section Properties Required for Steel Rolled Shape Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.1 ASD9 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties . . . . . . . . . . .
D.2 LRFD2 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties . . . . . . . . . .
D.3 BS449 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties . . . . . . . . . .
D.4 BS5950 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties . . . . . . . . .
D.5 TOWER2 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties . . . . . . . .
D.6 NF83 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties . . . . . . . . . . .
Prestored Steel Rolled Shape Tables for Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Design Code PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.1 ASD9 Code PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.2 LRFD2 Code PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.2.1 ASTM Steel Grades and Associated Values of Fy and Fu
Based on the 1989 AISC ASD Ninth Edition and 1993 AISC
LRFD Second Edition Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.3 BS449 Code PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.3.1 Steel Grades and Associated Allowable Equivalent Stress
(pe) and Yield Stress (Ys) Based on the 1975 British
Standard 449 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- vii -
A- 1
B- 1
C- 1
C- 3
C- 7
C- 8
C-10
C-11
C-13
D- 1
D- 2
D-10
D-12
D-15
D-17
D-20
E- 1
F- 1
F- 2
F- 8
F-14
F-15
F-19
Preface
F.4
F.5
F.6
BS5950 Code PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F.4.1 Steel Grades Based on the 1990 British Standard 5950
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4.2 Effective Length (LE) Used by the 1990 British Standard 5950
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOWER2 Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.5.1 TOWER2 Code Default Values of PARAMETERS
Determined by the Value of the TYPE PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.5.2 Bolt Type and Associated Shear and Tensile Strengths . . . . . . . . . .
NF83 Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INDEX
READER COMMENT FORM
- viii -
F-20
F-29
F-30
F-31
F-36
F-37
F-38
General
1.
Introduction
Introduction
User Documentation
This GTSTRUDL User Guide: Design manual is one of several documents which
constitute the full set of user documentation for GTSTRUDL and GTTABLE. Tables 1.1
and 1.2 contain a brief description of each document.
Table 1.1 describes User Guide documents which cover the following topics:
-
How to install and begin the execution of GTSTRUDL,
New features and other relevant information about each new version of
GTSTRUDL,
General philosophy and use of GTSTRUDL,
Examples of the use of GTSTRUDL, and
A concise description of a subset of GTSTRUDL commands.
Table 1.2 describes additional "user reference manual" documents which constitute the
complete GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual and GTTABLE User Manual. These
eleven documents contain the complete and thorough description of all features of
GTSTRUDL and GTTABLE.
Differences Between Steel and Reinforced Concrete

Design Procedures in GTSTRUDL
It is important to recognize that the procedures used in designing structural steel
members and reinforced concrete members in GTSTRUDL are based on two
fundamentally different approaches to design as follows:
For structural steel member design, GTSTRUDL selects structural steel rolled shapes
from specified tables of available rolled shapes and checks to assure that the shape
satisfies all steel code provisions for the active loads, as well as all user specified
member property constraints.
On the other hand, for reinforced concrete member design, no tables of available
shapes are used. Rather, reinforced concrete member design proportions either the
member cross-section dimensions, reinforcement bar sizes and locations, or both,
based upon the mathematical principles presented in the specified reinforced concrete
design code.
1-1
Introduction
General
Therefore, the engineer's use of GTSTRUDL and the commands used to control the
design process are different for steel and reinforced concrete member design. For
example, steel design uses commands like PARAMETERS, MEMBER
CONSTRAINTS, and SELECT to control the design process, while reinforced concrete
design uses comparable commands like DESIGN DATA, MEMBER SIMILARITIES, and
PROPORTION.
Format of the Descriptions of Commands in This Guide

For each command described in this Guide, the following format is used:
1.
Simple form of a command: This section shows the vocabulary words and
syntax of the command. In most cases, only a simplified subset of the command
is shown in this Guide. Refer to the GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual for a
complete description of each command.
2.
Description of command elements: This section provides a brief description

of the elements of the command. Such elements include the meaning of the data
provided with the command.
3.
Example: One or more very simple examples of how the command may be
used are shown.
4.
Explanation: A general description of the purpose of the command is given.
5.
ADDITIONS Mode: A detailed description of how the command operates in the

ADDITIONS mode is given.
6.
CHANGES Mode: A detailed description of how the command operates in the

CHANGES mode is given.
7.
DELETIONS Mode: A detailed description of how the command operates in the

DELETIONS mode is given.
8.
Extended Examples: A more complete example of the use of the command is

given.
Subset of GTSTRUDL Commands

Appendices A and B contain a summary of a subset of GTSTRUDL commands that
may be used to perform various types of information processing. The GTSTRUDL
User Reference Manual (Table 1.2) should be referred to for a complete description of
all available commands and Graphical User Interface (GTMenu) features.
1-2
General
Table 1.1
Introduction
GTSTRUDL Installation and Operations Guide, Release Guide, and

User Guide Documentation
Document
Brief Description
Installation and
Operations Guide
Describes the step-by-step procedure to install
Release Guide
For each new version of GTSTRUDL, the Release Guide

describes new validated features, performance
improvements, error corrections, known uncorrected
errors, and prerelease features.
GTSTRUDL User Guide

Getting Started
Describes how to install GTSTRUDL on a Personal
GTSTRUDL User Guide

Analysis
A condensed description of a subset of features from
GTSTRUDL User Guide

Design
A condensed description of a subset of features from
GTSTRUDL, and describes how to initiate the execution of

GTSTRUDL.
Computer, how to initiate the execution of GTSTRUDL,

and how to solve a variety of example problems. In
addition, this manual describes the structure of
GTSTRUDL's Problem Oriented Language (POL)
commands, and provides a brief description of important
features of GTSTRUDL.
model generation, linear static and dynamic frame and

finite element analysis, data base management, and
graphical display.
steel and reinforced concrete frame design.
1-3
Introduction
Table 1.2
General
GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual Documentation
Document
Brief Description
Abstract of Commands
Shows the POL command vocabulary and syntax

requirements for numerous commands in an abstract form
without explanations of usage.
Volume 1
Characteristics of finite element structural models

Global and local reference frames
General input/output
Static frame analysis
Automatic mesh generation by command
Data base management (ADDITIONS, CHANGES,
DELETIONS, ACTIVE, INACTIVE, LOAD LIST, SAVE, and
RESTORE).
Volume 2A
Design of steel frame structures according to the latest

steel design code specifications which are contained in
GTSTRUDL.
Volume AISC13
Design of steel frame structures according to the 13th

Edition AISC steel design code specification.
Volume ASD9-E
9th Edition AISC Steel Design Code for I-shape members

and variable values of Young's Modulus E.
Volume Unistrut
1986 AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Code with the 1989

Addendum.
Volume IS800
Indian Standard IS:800-1984 Steel Design Code.
Volume 2B
Design of steel frame structures according to previous

steel design code specifications which are contained in GT
STRUDL.
Volume 3
Finite element analysis

Curved member elements
Linear dynamic analysis
Nonlinear static analysis
Nonlinear dynamic analysis
Large sag cable nonlinear analysis
Special pile element
General graphical display
1-4
General
Introduction
Volume 4
Design of reinforced concrete frame structures according

to each R/C code specification contained in GTSTRUDL.
Volume 5
Data base exchange
Volume 7
SELOS (Sea Environment Load generation for OffShore

platforms).
Volume 8
Offshore platform analysis and design.
GTTABLE User Manual
Description of all features of GT TABLE. GT TABLE is

used to create tables of member cross section properties
which may be referenced by GTSTRUDL's MEMBER
PROPERTIES command. GT TABLE is most often used
to create tables of steel rolled shapes and their associated
section properties for use in both analysis and steel design
processing.
Base Plate
Steel Base Plate Modeling, Analysis, and Analysis Result

Review (accessed through the Help Option in the Base
Plate Model Wizard)
(Note: Volume 6 is no longer required)
1-5
Introduction
General
1-6
Steel Design
2.
Steel Design Commands

This Chapter describes a subset of the Steel Design commands as follows:
Description
Commands and Concepts

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Introduction to Steel Design

PARAMETERS
Effective Length Factor
(KY and KZ) Calculations
COLUMN LINE
2.5
2.6
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
SECTION
Overview of steel design

Steel design control parameters
Explanation of the AISC KY and KZ
Nomograph equations
Specify column line members for which KY
and KZ is to be computed
Specification of design constraints
Specification of locations along a member at
which code checks are to be performed
Select steel rolled shapes
Equate member sizes
Check code conformance
Output details of code checks
Compute and output member weights
Output steel design information
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
SELECT
TAKE
CHECK
SUMMARIZE
STEEL TAKEOFF
PRINT Commands for
Steel Design
2.13 GTTABLE: Displaying and
Creating Tables of Steel
Rolled Shapes
2.14 Steel Design Examples
Displaying and Creating tables of steel

rolled shapes
Examples of steel design
2-1
Steel Design
2-2
Steel Design
2.1

Structural engineering is a very highly result-dependent process. Design decisions
made by the structural engineer often depend on the review and evaluation of
previously created results. Following such review and evaluation, the engineer will
decide on appropriate modifications to the structure under design for the primary
purpose of creating the "best" possible solution in the context of safety, reliability,
functionality, constructability, cost of engineering, cost of construction, cost of
operation, and cost of maintenance. Modifications to the design are also driven by the
demands of the client, the fabricator, the contractor, and other entities that have an
interest in the structure under design. This result-dependent and iterative process of
structural design can be briefly summarized as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Propose several alternative configurations for the structure.

Select one alternative for preliminary design.
Create the finite element model including:
a.
Geometry (joint coordinates)
b.
Topology (member and finite element incidences)
c.
Support boundary conditions
d.
Member and finite element boundary conditions
e.
Material properties
f.
Member and finite element properties
g.
Independent loading conditions
h.
Loading combinations and design loads
i.
Other information required to properly describe the model.
Perform analysis (static, dynamic, linear, nonlinear, etc.).
Display results.
Review and evaluate results.
Perform design (steel, reinforced concrete, etc.)
Reanalyze the current design.
Review and evaluate the current design against all design criteria.
If the design does not satisfy all relevant criteria, modify the design, and repeat
steps 8 and 9 above.
If the design satisfies all relevant criteria, but all alternative designs have not
been investigated, select another alternative for preliminary design and go to step
3 above.
After all desired alternatives have been investigated on a preliminary design
basis, select the "best" alternative and perform final design.
During the entire process of design and construction, additional design
modifications may be required in response to problems of fabrication,
transportation, construction, aesthetics, function, cost, and many other factors.
2-3
Steel Design
GTSTRUDL's command processing philosophy, combined with its data base

management features (GTSTRUDL User Guide: Analysis, Chapter 5), provides the
structural engineer with a very powerful tool with which to control this result-dependent
and iterative process.
This Chapter describes the commands provided by GTSTRUDL to perform those
functions of the process concerned with the "design" of steel framed structures
(hereinafter referred to as "steel design").
In GTSTRUDL, steel design allows the structural engineer to perform the following:
1.
Specify information required by various steel design code specifications, but

which information is not used in any way by the analysis facilities of GTSTRUDL.
Such additional information is specified under the PARAMETERS command
(Section 2.2), and includes information such as the design code name, the grade
of steel being used, unbraced lengths, effective length factors, etc.
2.
Specify constraints on the cross-section dimensions of steel rolled shapes to be

designed. Such constraints may be expressed in absolute terms such as
maximum and/or minimum depth, flange width, web thickness, etc.. Such
constraints may also be expressed in relational terms such as the flange width
of a group of beams may not be greater than the minimum distance between
flanges of a group of columns. Constraints are specified with the MEMBER
CONSTRAINTS command (Section 2.5).
3.
Design rolled steel shapes. For each member to be designed, the lightest weight
steel rolled shape is selected from a specified TABLE of steel rolled shapes,
where such selected shapes satisfy both previously specified MEMBER
CONSTRAINTS and the requirements of previously specified design code
specifications. The SELECT command (Section 2.7) causes such design to
occur. GTSTRUDL includes several predefined tables of steel rolled shapes.
Additional tables may be created by using the GTTABLE computer program
(Section 2.13) which is included as part of GTSTRUDL software.
4.
Check an existing design against the provisions of design code specifications,

and/or against any previously specified set of member constraints. The CHECK
command (Section 2.9) causes such checking to occur.
5.
Perform design smoothing of an existing design. Design smoothing is a process

whereby the structural engineer causes changes in member sizes which will
make the structure easier to fabricate, easier to assemble, or satisfy other
requirements not addressed by a design code specification or member
constraints. The TAKE command (Section 2.8) causes such design smoothing
to occur.
2-4
Steel Design
6.
Display results of design and code checking including the details of specific code
provision checks (e.g., allowable stresses, actual stresses, ratios of actual to
allowable code provisions, interaction equation values, etc.), and the results of
design and design smoothing (e.g., selected steel section sizes). Commands to
cause such information display include the SUMMARIZE command (Section
2.10), and additional options of the PRINT command (Section 2.12).
Table 2.1-1 summarizes the commands that are used in connection with the design of
steel rolled shapes, and which are described in the following Sections 2.2 to 2.14. The
GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual should be referred to for a description of
additional commands that may be used for the design of welded connections between
the end of certain steel shapes and base plates to which they are connected. In
addition, the details of specific design code provision checks performed by GTSTRUDL
steel design for each steel rolled shape, and for each design code specification, are
fully described in the GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual, Volumes 2A and 2B.
Examples of the use of GTSTRUDL for steel design are shown in Section 2.14, and in
the GTSTRUDL User Guide: Getting Started, Chapters 3, 4, and 5.
2-5
Table 2.1-1
Steel Design
Commands for Steel Rolled Shape Design, Code Checking, and Result Display
Command Name
Brief Description
PARAMETERS
Specify additional information required by various steel design code

specifications.
COLUMN LINE
Identifies lines of columns which are used in subsequent automatic

calculations of column effective length factors KY and KZ.
ASME LOAD TYPE
Specify loading condition service limits provided for by the ASME

NF17 and NF83 design codes in GTSTRUDL.
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
Specify constraints on the cross-section dimensions of steel rolled

shapes to be designed.
SECTION
Specify locations along members at which internal member forces

and moments are to be computed, and at which code checks are to
be made.
SELECT
Cause the selection of the lightest steel rolled shapes, from

specified tables of available shapes, which satisfy both design code
specifications and member constraint requirements.
TAKE
Performs design smoothing of an existing design.
CHECK
Causes an existing design to be checked against design code

specifications, and/or to be checked against member constraint
requirements.
SUMMARIZE DESIGN/
CODE CHECK results
Display results of design and code checking including the details of

specific code provision checks.
PRINT select and code

check control information,
and steel shape properties
Display current values of parameters and constraints used, and

display summary of all available parameters, constraints, and
summarize options, and display current member sizes.
2-6
Steel Design
2.2
PARAMETERS Command
PARAMETERS Command
PARAMETERS
p-name parameter-specs
C
C
C
command elements,
p-name =
Parameter name of from 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters. Available

parameter names are listed in the Appendices for each steel design
code, respectively.
v1 , v2
Parameter values associated with the parameter name. These values

may be in the form of 1 to 8 character alphanumeric names, or they
may be decimal numerical values. Default values or default actions to
compute such values are shown in the Appendices for each steel
design code respectively.
list
a list (GTSTRUDL User Guide: Analysis, Section 4.1) of joint, member,

or loading condition names.
2-7
PARAMETERS Command
Steel Design
Example
PARAMETERS
CODE ASD9 ALL MEMBERS
TBLNAM WBEAM9 MEMBERS 1 TO 100, 200 TO 300 BY 5
TBLNAM WCOLUMN9 MEMBERS 'COLA-201' TO 'COLA-251' BY 2
STEELGRD A36 MEMBERS 1 TO 100, 200 TO 300 BY 5
STEELGRD A572-G50 MEMBERS 'COLA-201' TO 'COLA-251' BY 2
FRUNLCF 0.5 MEMBERS 1 TO 100, 200 TO 300 BY 5
Explanation
The PARAMETERS command is used to specify additional information that is required
by various steel design code specifications, but which information is not used in any
way by the analysis facilities of GTSTRUDL. Such additional information includes
information such as the controlling design code name, the grade of steel being used,
unbraced lengths, effective length factors, etc. The only required PARAMETER is
CODE.
Each specific steel design code has a set of applicable parameters that are used by
that code as described in the Appendices. Each parameter is associated with a
parameter value. Parameter values may be one of the following types:
1.
Default value or default action:

If a parameter is not specified in a PARAMETERS command, then the parameter
value that is used is either a specific default value, or a default action, as
shown in the Appendices.
A default action is either "REQUIRED" or "COMPUTED". REQUIRED means
that a value for the parameter must be specified in a PARAMETERS command.
If it is not, then an error message will be issued and steel design or code check
will not be performed. COMPUTED means that if the parameter value is not
given, then it will be computed as described in the Appendices.
2.
Standard value:
In the case where a parameter value is not specified for an individual member,
joint, or loading condition, the specified value is assumed to be the standard
value of the parameter. In other words, the standard value is the value specified
for all members, joints, or loading conditions, and it becomes the default value
of the parameter.
2-8
Steel Design
3.
PARAMETERS Command
Individual value:
An individual value may be assigned to members, joints, or loading conditions.
When given, the individual value is used rather than the default value, the default
action, or any previously specified standard value.
In the ADDITIONS mode the PARAMETERS command operates as follows:

1.
If a parameter name is given, then a parameter value must be specified.
2.
If a parameter name is not given, then either the default value is used, or a
default action is taken, as described in the Appendices for each available
parameter name not given in the PARAMETERS command.
3.
When the ALL option is specified (i.e., ALL MEMBERS, ALL JOINTS, or ALL
LOADS), the specified parameter value is taken as the "standard value" of the
parameter. Further, when the ALL option is specified for a parameter, all
previously specified individual parameter values are deleted for all members,
joints, or loading conditions as appropriate.
4.
When a "list" of member, joints or loading condition names is given, then the
individual parameter value preceding the list is assigned to each individual
member, joint, or loading condition named in the list.
5.
In the "ALL BUT" form of the PARAMETERS command, the value v1 is taken as
the new standard value, all previous individual values for the parameter are
deleted for all members, joints, or loading conditions, and a new individual
parameter value v2 is assigned to the member, joint, or loading condition names
in the list.
6.
Once specified, and unless deleted in the DELETIONS mode (see DELETIONS
mode below), only the most recent standard value, and the individual values
specified after the standard value is specified, are retained for each parameter.
CHANGES Mode
The PARAMETERS command operates the same in both the ADDITIONS and
CHANGES modes. That is, whenever a PARAMETERS command is given, the new
parameter value(s) replace previous parameter values. Recall again that when the ALL
option is specified for a parameter, all previous individual values of the parameter are
deleted for all members, joints, or loading conditions as appropriate.
2-9
PARAMETERS Command
Steel Design
DELETIONS Mode
In the DELETIONS mode, PARAMETERS may be returned to their standard values for
the specified joints, members, or loading conditions, or to their default values for ALL
joints, members, or loading conditions.
DELETIONS
PARAMETERS
C
C
ADDITIONS
command elements,
p-name
list
Parameter name of from 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters.

Available parameter names are listed in the Appendices for each
steel design code respectively.
a list (GTSTRUDL User Guide: Analysis, Section 4.1) of joint,

member, or loading condition names.
2 - 10
Steel Design
PARAMETERS Command
Extended Example
PARAMETERS
TBLNAM WBEAM9 MEMBERS 1 TO 50
TBLNAM WCOLUMN9 MEMBERS 101 TO 160
STEELGRD A36 MEMBERS 1 TO 50
STEELGRD A572-G50 MEMBERS 101 TO 160
C
C $ Other commands
C
PARAMETERS
TBLNAM TEES9 MEMBERS 1 TO 20
TBLNAM PIPES9 MEMBERS 149 TO 160
STEELGRD A588 MEMBERS 149 TO 160
C
C
C
The parameter values following the second PARAMETERS command are as follows:
Parameter
Name
Parameter
Value
Member Names to Which the

Parameter Values are Assigned
CODE
ASD9
All members
TBLNAM
WBEAM9
Members 21 to 50
TEES9
Members 1 to 20
WCOLUMN9
Members 101 to 148
PIPES9
Members 149 to 160
A36
Members 1 to 50
A572-G50
Members 101 to 148
A588
Members 149 to 160
STEELGRD
2 - 11
PARAMETERS Command
Steel Design
DELETIONS
PARAMETERS
TBLNAM ALL MEMBERS
STEELGRD ALL MEMBERS
ADDITIONS
C
C
C
The parameter values following the DELETIONS of PARAMETERS command are as

follows:
Parameter
Name
Parameter
Value
Member Names to Which the

Parameter Values are Assigned
CODE
ASD9
All members
TBLNAM
WSHAPES9
All members
STEELGRD
A36
All Members
2 - 12
Steel Design
2.3
Effective Length Factor (KY and KZ) Calculation

The effective length factors for columns, KY and KZ, can be automatically computed
during the processing of the SELECT (Section 2.7) or CHECK (Section 2.9) commands
as follows:
1.
The value of the parameter COMPK must be set to YES in the PARAMETERS
command (Section 2.2) for those columns for which the effective length factors
are to be automatically computed.
2.
The COLUMN LINE command (Section 2.4) must be given in order to identify the
column members in the column line whose I/L properties will be included in the
calculation of the factors GA and GB as shown below.
3.
Any member SELECTED or CHECKED will have its effective length factors KY
and KZ computed if the member is included in a prior COLUMN LINE command,
and if its COMPK parameter is equal to YES
The automatic computation of the effective length factors is performed in a manner

consistent with alignment charts presented in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
AISC presents two alignment charts as a "rational method" for the computation of
effective length factors in continuous frames, and for the cases of a sidesway
prevented (braced frame, no sidesway buckling), and sidesway not prevented
(unbraced frame, sidesway buckling possible). The AISC alignment charts are based
on a formulation originally developed by O. J. Julian and L. S. Lawrence, and presented
in detail by Thomas C. Kavanagh in a paper entitled, "Effective Length of Framed
Columns," and published in the Transactions, ASCE, 127, Part II (1962), pages 81-101.
In addition, the formulation of the alignment charts are also presented in the text book
by Charles G. Salmon and John E. Johnson entitled, "Steel Structures: Design and
Behavior," Second Edition, 1980, published by Harper & Row. The formulas upon
which the alignment charts are based, and which formulas are incorporated into
GTSTRUDL, are presented in the Salmon and Johnson textbook as Eq. 14.3.28 for
unbraced frames, and Eq. 14.3.15 for braced frames, and are as follows:
2 - 13
A.
Steel Design
Sidesway not prevented (unbraced frames, sidesway buckling

possible):
This case is denoted by setting the GTSTRUDL SDSWAYY and/or SDSWAYZ
PARAMETERS equal to YES in the PARAMETERS command (Section 2.2).
B.
Sidesway prevented (braced frames, no sidesway buckling):

This case is denoted by setting the GTSTRUDL SDSWAYY and/or SDSWAYZ
PARAMETERS equal to NO in the PARAMETERS command (Section 2.2).
2 - 14
Steel Design
In the above two formulas, the symbols GA and GB are the ratios of column to girder
rotational stiffness measures I/L at the start and end of the column respectively as
defined in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction as follows:
It is important to note the following assumptions and modeling conditions which govern
the automatic computation of KY and KZ in GTSTRUDL:
1.
Column members for which effective length factors are to be automatically

computed must have prismatic cross-sections with TABLE member properties.
2.
SPACE TRUSS and PLANE TRUSS members are ignored during the automatic
computation of effective length factors.
3.
The unbraced or braced frame condition of a column member is determined

based on the values specified for parameters SDSWAYY and SDSWAYZ (YES
for sidesway not prevented (unbraced), and NO for sidesway prevented
(braced)).
4.
When the far end of a girder, or other member restraining the column, is pinned
connected to a joint, the associated value of GA or GB is divided by 2.0 for
unbraced frames, and GA or GB is divided by 1.5 for braced frames.
5.
An equivalent moment of inertia, IY or IZ, is used for the GA and GB when a

girder frames into a column at a non-orthogonal angle. The equivalent IY and IZ
is computed by transforming the non-orthogonal girder properties into an
equivalent orthogonal girder for the purpose of computing the GA and GB factors.
6.
If a girder has any MOMENT RELEASE (X, Y or Z) at the end of the girder
connected to the joint at the top or bottom of a column member for which
effective length factors are to be computed, the contribution of the I/L of such
girder to the GA or GB factor is ignored.
7.
In the case of an elastic spring support condition, the values of GA and GB

should be specified by the user (i.e., by specifying the parameters GAY and GAZ,
or GBY and GBZ as appropriate in the PARAMETERS command). GTSTRUDL
will not automatically compute effective length factors for members which
connect to joints where spring constants have been specified in the JOINT
RELEASES command.
2 - 15

8.
Steel Design
When computing the G factor at the end of a column member connected to a

support joint, the column member is assumed to be pin connected to the support
joint under the following conditions:
a.
The column member has a BETA angle (GTSTRUDL User Guide:

Analysis, Section 8.5) which is a multiple of 90 degrees, and the centroidal
axis of the column member is parallel to one of the global axes, and either
the end of the column connected to the support joint has a MEMBER
MOMENT RELEASE, or the support joint has a JOINT MOMENT
RELEASE, about an axis which is normal to the plane of bending of the
column.
b.
The column member has a BETA angle which is not a multiple of 90

degrees, and either the end of the column connected to the support joint
has any MEMBER MOMENT RELEASE (i.e., MOMENT X, Y, or Z), or the
support joint has any JOINT MOMENT RELEASE.
c.
The centroidal axis of the column member is not parallel to one of the
global axes, and either the end of the column connected to the support
joint has any MOMENT RELEASE (i.e., MOMENT X, Y, or Z), or the
support joint has any JOINT MOMENT RELEASE.
9.
A column member that is connected to a support joint having JOINT FORCE

RELEASES (i.e., releases other than MOMENT X, Y, or Z) is ignored in the
automatic effective length factor computation.
10.
A column member having a MEMBER FORCE RELEASE at either end is ignored

in the automatic effective length factor computation.
11.
When the centroidal axis of a column member is not parallel to one of the global
axes, girders framing into the column must be parallel to one of the global planes.
Beams that are not parallel to one of the global planes are ignored during the
effective length computation.
12.
Effective length factors are not computed for a column member which has no
girder members connected to either of the joints at the ends of the member.
13.
Note that if a column member is braced at a point between the joints it is

connected to, then the unbraced length for buckling of the column may be
specified by the parameters LY and LZ in the PARAMETERS command.
2 - 16
Steel Design
Extended example
The following shows example uses of the COLUMN LINE (Section 2.4) and
PARAMETER (Section 2.2) commands that must be used in order to have automatic
computation of column effective length factors, KY and KZ:
$
$
$
$
A structure is defined and analysis results are computed. Following

the analysis, the GTSTRUDL data base is saved in a file called
'DESIGN. Then, the data base DESIGN is restored and the design of
columns is performed as follows:
RESTORE 'DESIGN'
$ Define COLUMN LINES
COLUMN LINE 'COLLINE1' 'COL1' TO 'COL20'
$ Design PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
STEELGRD A441 ALL MEMBERS
$ Compute K-Factors KY and KZ
COMPK YES MEMBERS 'COL1' TO 'COL40'
SDSWAYY YES MEMBERS 'COL1' TO 'COL40' $ Sidesway permitted
SDSWAYZ YES MEMBERS 'COL1' TO 'COL40' $ Sidesway permitted
$ Specify Design LOAD LIST.
LOAD LIST 'DESLOAD1' 'DESLOAD2'
$ Design the beams first since beam I/L ratios are used in the automatic
$ computation of column effective length factor computations.
SELECT MEMBERS 'BEAM1' TO 'BEAM100' AS BEAM
$ Design the columns next. Note that the effective length factors for
$ column members 'COL1' to 'COL40' will be automatically computed.
SELECT MEMBERS 'COL1' TO 'COL40' AS COLUMN
$ Save the current data base with the new member properties
SAVE 'DESIGN'
FINISH
2 - 17
COLUMN LINE Command
2.4
Steel Design
COLUMN LINE Command
C
C
C
command elements,
in, 'an'
an integer, or a 1 to 8 character alphanumeric, name of

the column line.
list
a list (GTSTRUDL User Guide: Analysis, Section 4.1) of

column member names which belong to the column line.
Examples
COLUMN LINE 'A1' MEMBERS 1 TO 10
COLUMN LINE 'A2' MEMBERS 101 TO 120
COLUMN LINE 'GA-1' MEMBERS 'COL-31' TO 'COL-41' BY 2
2 - 18
Steel Design
COLUMN LINE Command
Explanation
For those column members where the value of the COMPK parameter (Section 2.2) is
specified as YES, then an automatic computation of the KY and KZ effective length
factors is performed during a SELECT or CHECK command. The automatic
computation of effective length factors KY and KZ (Section 2.3) requires the use of (I/L)
ratios of column and girder members which are incident on the joints at each end of the
member for which effective length factors are being computed.
In order to compute the effective length factors, and in addition to the COMPK
parameter being specified as YES, it is necessary to identify the members which are
involved in the KY and KZ computations. In the ADDITIONS mode, the COLUMN LINE
command is used to identify the column members in the column line which are involved
in the KY and KZ computations. The column members identified must all lie in a
straight line (i.e., their centroidal axes must be colinear), and their positive local x-axis
directions must all be in the same direction. GTSTRUDL will then automatically identify
the girders involved in the computation of effective length factors as any member that
is incident on the joint at the top or bottom of the column member for which KY and KZ
is being computed.
CHANGES Mode
The COLUMN LINE command operates the same in both the ADDITIONS and
CHANGES modes. If changes are required in the definition of a column line, the
column line must be deleted in the DELETIONS mode, and then redefined in the
ADDITIONS mode.
DELETIONS Mode
In the DELETIONS mode, the column line definition is deleted. Note that no members
are deleted. Rather, only the column line definition is deleted.
DELETIONS
ADDITIONS
2 - 19
COLUMN LINE Command
Steel Design
Extended Example
COLUMN LINE 'COL1' MEMBERS 1 2
COLUMN LINE 'COL2' MEMBERS 3 4 5
COLUMN LINE 'COL3' MEMBERS 6 TO 9
COLUMN LINE 'COL4' MEMBERS 10 TO 13
$
PARAMETERS
COMPK YES MEMBERS 1 TO 13
$
DELETIONS
COLUMN LINE 'COL2'
ADDITIONS
CHECK MEMBERS 1 TO 13 AS COLUMN
Figure 2.4-1 illustrates this example. Effective length factors will be computed for
column members 1, 2, and 6 to 13 during the processing of the CHECK command.
However, effective length factors will not be computed for members 3, 4 and 5.
For example, when computing KY and KZ for member 7, the (I/L) ratios of column
members 6, 7, and 8 will be used, and the (I/L) ratios of girder members 105, 106, 102,
and 103 will be used. Section 2.3 describes how the KY and KZ are computed using
the (I/L) ratios and based on the AISC Nomograph procedure.
2 - 20
Steel Design
COLUMN LINE Command
Figure 2.4-1 Example Frame for COLUMN LINE Command
2 - 21
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS Command
2.5
Steel Design
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
list1 constraint-specs
C
C
list1 constraint-specs
command elements,
EQ, LT, LE =
GT, GE, NE
EQual to; Less Than; Less than or Equal to;

Greater Than; Greater than or Equal to; and Not Equal to
respectively
'a1'
The 1 to 8 character alphanumeric name in single quotes of the

steel cross-section property to be constrained. Properties that
may be constrained are shown in Table 2.5-1.
v1
Limiting numerical value which constrains (in an absolute

sense) the property 'a1'.
'a2'
The name of the steel cross-section property which is used to

constrain (in a relational sense) property 'a1'.
list1
list of member names whose property 'a1' is to be constrained.
list2
member names whose property 'a2' may constrain the property

'a1'.
2 - 22
Steel Design
Example
UNITS INCH
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
$ Constrain nominal depth of members 1 to 10 to equal 14.0 inches
1 TO 10 CONSTRAIN 'ND' EQ 14.0
$ Constrain the total depth parallel to local z-axis of members 75 to 97
$ to be less than the minimum distance between flanges in the local
$ y-axis direction of members 1 to 10
75 TO 97 CONSTRAIN 'ZD' LT MINIMUM 'INTYD' OF MEMBS 1 TO 10
Explanation
Member constraints are design restrictions placed on the cross-section properties of
steel rolled shapes that are selected in response to a subsequent SELECT command
(Section 2.7). In the ADDITIONS mode, the MEMBER CONSTRAINTS command is
used to specify such restrictions in terms of the cross-section properties of steel rolled
shapes. Such restrictions may be expressed in absolute terms such as maximum
and/or minimum values of properties, or expressed in relational terms where one
property of a group of members may be used to constrain a property of another group
of members. Any number of constraints may be specified for a member in the
ADDITIONS mode. Properties that may be constrained are described in Table 2.5-1.
It should be noted that no attempt is made to determine if the specified constraints are
mutually exclusive or not. If the specified constraints for any one member create a
condition under which a shape cannot be selected (such as if the depth of a member
is constrained to be greater than 30 inches, and less than 24 inches), then a warning
message will be displayed following the SELECT command indicating that no shape
is available that can satisfy the specified constraints.
2 - 23
Steel Design
Table 2.5-1 GTSTRUDL Constrainable Properties
Name
Meaning
AX
Cross sectional area
AY
Y direction shear area
AZ
Z direction shear area
BF/2TF
CW
One-half flange width over flange thickness

Warping constant
D/TW
Depth of beam over web thickness
FLTK
Flange thickness
GRPNUM
ID
INTYD
Group number of profile

Inside diameter of the pipe
Clear depth of web (YD minus twice FLTK)
IX
Torsional moment of inertia
IY
Moment of inertia about Y axis
IZ
Moment of inertia about Z axis
LEG1
Long leg of angle
LEG2
Short leg of angle
ND
Nominal depth of the profile
OD
Outside diameter of the pipe
RT
Radius of gyration for flange and 1/6 of web about plane of web
RY
Radius of gyration about Y axis
RZ
Radius of gyration about Z axis
SHAPE
SPACING
Indicates the profile shape. See Table 2.5-2

Back-to-back spacing in double angles
SY
Section modulus about Y axis
SZ
Section modulus about Z axis
2 - 24
Steel Design
Table 2.5-1 (continued) GTSTRUDL Constrainable Properties
Name
Meaning
THICK
Thickness of angle
WBTK
Web thickness
WEIGHT
Weight per unit length
YC
Distance from centroid to extreme fiber along Y axis
YD
Depth of member along Y axis
YD/AFL
Depth in Y direction over area of one flange
ZC
Distance from centroid to extreme fiber along Z axis
ZD
Depth of member along Z axis
ZY
Plastic modulus about Y axis
ZZ
Plastic modulus about Z axis
2 - 25
Steel Design
Table 2.5-2 Profile Shape Numbers

"SHAPE"
Value
Shape
Table
1.0
W, WF
1.1
HP/S/M, STEEL78, M/S/HP9
1.2
HP
1.3
2.0
CHANNELS, STEEL78, CHANNEL9
2.1
MC
CHANNELS, STEEL78, CHANNEL9
3.0
Single Angle
4.0
WT
TEES, STEEL78, TEES9
4.1
ST
TEES, STEEL78. TEES9
4.2
HPT
*none*
4.3
MT
TEES, STEEL78, TEES9
4.4
Double Angle
EQDBLANG
equal legs back-to-back
4.5
Double Angle
LLDBLAND
long legs back-to-back
4.6
Double Angle
SLDBLANG
short legs back-to-back
5.0
Round Bar
5.1
Pipe
6.0
Square Bar
BARS
6.1
Rectangular Bar
RBAR
6.2
Structural
Tubing
STEELW, STEELW78, STEEL78, STEELWF,

WSHAPES9
ANGLES, EQANGLE, ULANGLE, USANGLE
BARS
AISCPIPE, PIPES9
AISCTUBE, TUBES9
2 - 26
Steel Design

Member constraints may be expressed in either absolute or relational terms as
follows:
1.
Absolute constraint:
An absolute constraint is specified by giving a numerical value (v) which is
used as the constraint value for property 'a1'. The cross-section property 'a1'
is then required to be equal to, less than, less than or equal to, greater than,
greater than or equal to, or not equal to, the constraint value v.
2.
Relational Constraint:
A relational constraint is specified by giving a cross-section property 'a2'
which is used as the constraint value for property 'a1'. The cross-section
property 'a1' is then required to be equal to, less than, less than or equal to,
greater than, greater than or equal to, or not equal to, the value of the
constraint property 'a2', or the maximum or minimum value of the constraint
property 'a2'. The constraint property 'a2' is taken from among the member
names listed in "list2".
CHANGES Mode
In the CHANGES mode, the MEMBER CONSTRAINTS command will cause all
previously specified constraints for the member names in "list1" to be deleted, and
the one specified constraint to be added. If additional constraints are also desired,
then additional MEMBER CONSTRAINTS commands must be given in the
ADDITIONS mode following the CHANGES mode.
DELETIONS Mode
DELETIONS
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
list (CONSTRAINT 'a1')
C
C
C
list (CONSTRAINT 'a1')
2 - 27
Steel Design
In the DELETIONS mode, the MEMBER CONSTRAINTS command may be used

as follows:
1.
When the CONSTRAIN 'a1' option is not given, then all previously specified
constraints are deleted for the member names given in the "list", or
2.
When the CONSTRAIN 'a1' option is given, then only previously specified
constraints associated with the property 'a1' are deleted for the member
names given in the "list".
Extended Example
UNITS CM
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
$ Constrain members 1 to 10 to have depths less than or equal to 45 CM
$ and greater than 20 CM, and to have flange widths less than 27 CM.
$ These are absolute constraints.
1 TO 10 CONSTRAIN 'YD' LE 45.0
1 TO 10 CONSTRAIN 'YD' GT 20.0
1 TO 10 CONSTRAIN 'ZD' LE 27.0
$ Constrain the area of members 201 to 250 to be greater than or equal to
$ the maximum area of members 350 to 375. These are relational
$ constraints.
201 to 250 CONSTRAIN 'AX' GE 'AX' OF MEMBERS 350 TO 375
C $ Other commands
C
$ Replace all previous constraints for members 1 to 10 with the constraints
$ that their depths shall be less than the minimum depth of members 50 to
$ 55, and that their flange widths shall be less than or equal to 29 CM.
CHANGES
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
1 TO 10 CONSTRAIN 'YD' LT MINIMUM 'YD' OF MEMB 50 TO 55
ADDITIONS
C
C $ Other commands
C
$ Delete all constraints for members 3, 7 and 9, and
$ only delete the 'YD' constraint for members 2 and 4.
DELETIONS
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
379
2 4 CONSTRAINT 'YD'
ADDITIONS
2 - 28
Steel Design
2.6
SECTION Command
SECTION Command
command elements,
list
a list of member names. Refer to the GTSTRUDL User Guide:

Analysis, Section 4.1 for a description of "list".
Number of sections along the length of the members (maximum value

is 50)
Examples
SECTION FR NS 5 0.0 .2 .5 .8 1.0
SECT FR NS 3 0.0 0.7 1.0 MEMBERS 10 TO 20
SECT FR DS 0.0 0.1 MEMBS 30 TO 40 BY 2 'ABC' 'G10' TO 'G15'
UNITS METERS
SECTION NS 3 1.7 3.25 5.75 MEMBS 25 'B-7'
Explanation
The SECTION command may be used to identify one or more sections (points) along
a member's local x axis. Section locations are subsequently used by the SELECT
command (Section 2.7) as the points at which internal member forces are to be
computed for the purpose of steel rolled section design. A maximum of 50 such
sections may be specified.
In the ADDITIONS mode, the SECTION command establishes the sections along a
member at which internal member results are computed. The SECTION command will
replace previously specified section values, if any.
2 - 29
SECTION Command
Steel Design
The SECTION command operates in the following way:

1.
If the "MEMBER list" option is given, then the specified section locations are
associated with each specific member named in the "list". These are referred to
as "specific section locations".
2.
If the "MEMBER list" option is not given, then the specified section locations are
used for all active members for which specific section locations have not been
given in either a preceding or subsequent SECTION command where the
"MEMBER list" is given. These are called "general section locations". In other
words, if specific section locations have been given for a member, then these
section locations are used for that member. But, if specific section locations are
not given for a member, then the general section locations are used for that
member.
3.
If the "FRACTIONAL" option is given, then the location values v1, v2, ....., vi are
given as nondimensional decimal fractions of the member(s)'s length. If the
"FRACTIONAL" option is not given, then the location values are given as actual
distances in the currently active units (i.e., the length units given in the most
previous UNITS command).
4.
Either the NS or DS form of the SECTION command must be given. They

operate as follows:
(a)
If the NS (i.e., Number of Sections) form is used, then the actual location
of each individual section must be specified where:
i
the total number of section locations (must not exceed 50), and
v1, v2, ....., vi
the actual location of each section measured from the start of

the member, and given as a decimal fraction of the member's
length (FRACTIONAL given), or as an actual distance in the
current units (FRACTIONAL omitted).
(b)
If the DS (i.e., Distance between Sections) form is used, then a constant

distance between section locations must be specified where:
v1
the location of the first section (same as the v1 value given in

the NS form) along the local x-axis of the member, and
measured from the start of the member, and given as a decimal
fraction of the member's length (FRACTIONAL given), or as an
actual distance in the current units (FRACTIONAL omitted), and
2 - 30
Steel Design
SECTION Command
v2
the distance between each successive section along the local

x-axis of the member, and given as a decimal fraction of the
member length (FRACTIONAL given), or as an actual distance
in current units (FRACTIONAL omitted).
CHANGES Mode
The SECTION command operates the same in both the ADDITIONS and CHANGES
modes. If changes are required in a member's section locations, then the SECTION
command should be given again for the member. The new section locations will
replace the previous section locations.
DELETIONS Mode
Individual section locations may not be deleted. Rather, all specific section locations
must be deleted for one or more members that were named in a preceding SECTION
command where the "MEMBER list" option was given. The following form of the
SECTION command is used to delete all specific section locations for a member:
DELETIONS
SECTIONS MEMBERS list
where,
list
list of member names. See the GTSTRUDL User Guide: Analysis,

Section 4.1 for a description of "list".
2 - 31
SECTION Command
Steel Design
Extended Example
The following example identifies various sections along the members in Figure 2.6-1
at which steel member selection will be performed:
STRUDL
C
C
C
C
$
$
$
$
$
$
Commands to describe structure in Figure 2.6-1 and to

perform STIFFNESS ANALYSIS
Output internal member results as follows:

Identify locations for:
1.
Members 5, 7, and 9 at the start, middle and end
2.
Members 101 TO 110 at the start and end only
SECTION FRAC NS 3 0.0 0.5 1.0 MEMBERS 5 7 9

SECTION FR NS 2 0.0 1.0 MEMBERS 101 TO 115
SELECT MEMBERS 5 7 9 101 TO 115
$
$
$
$
$
$
Identify locations for:

1.
Members 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 at the locations of the applied
concentrated forces, and
2.
Members 8 and 10 at 5-sections each separated by 2 Meter
distances and where the first section is at the start of each
member.
UNITS METERS
SECTION NS 2 2.0 7.0 MEMBERS 1 3
SECTION NS 1 3.0 MEMBERS 2 4 6
SECTION DS 0.0 2.0 MEMBERS 8 10
SELECT MEMBERS 1, 2, 3, 4 TO 10 BY 2
$
$
Identify locations at 21 equally spaced sections along

members 1 TO 10
SECTION FR DS 0.0 0.05 MEMBERS 1 TO 10
CHECK CODE MEMBERS 1 TO 10
2 - 32
Steel Design
SECTION Command
Figure 2.6-1 SECTION and Steel Design SELECT/CHECK Commands
2 - 33
SELECT Command
2.7
Steel Design
SELECT Command
command elements,
list1
= list of member names to be selected (i.e., designed) from specified

shape tables.
list2
= list of member names to be excluded from the selection process.
n1
= optional number (maximum of 50) of equally spaced section locations

along the members, including the start and end locations, at which
design code checks will be performed. The default value is 3 (i.e., start,
middle, and end locations along the members).
n2
= same as n1 except that the default value is 2 (i.e., start and end
locations along the members).
'codename' = name of a specific design code available in GTSTRUDL, and pursuant

to which the specified members will be designed. Available steel design
code names are given in Appendix A. Note: 'codename' must be given
either in the SELECT command with single quotes, or in a prior
PARAMETERS command without single quotes.
Example
LOAD LIST 1 11 TO 15
SECTION FRACT NS 5 0.0 0.333 0.65 0.80 1.0 MEMBERS 1 TO 11 BY 2
SELECT MEMBERS 1 TO 11 BY 2
SELECT MEMBERS 2 TO 12 BY 2 AS BEAM 11
SELECT MEMBERS 101 TO 110 AS COLUMN
2 - 34
Steel Design
SELECT Command
Explanation
The SELECT command causes the design of steel rolled shapes to occur. In the
context of steel design, "design" means the selection of the lightest weight steel rolled
shape from a specified table of steel rolled shapes.
Design is performed in accordance with all previously specified PARAMETER values,
with all previously specified MEMBER CONSTRAINTS, and with the provisions of a
design code specified by the SELECT command or a prior PARAMETER command.
In the following, the words "design" and "select" are used synonymously.
Member selection is based on the results of existing member force and moment
analysis results. The member analysis results upon which steel design is based must
be those that are stored in the GTSTRUDL data base as static analysis results (e.g.,
those created by prior STIFFNESS ANALYSIS, CREATE LOADING COMBINATION,
COMBINE, and CREATE PSEUDO STATIC LOADING commands).
The specific locations along a member where internal member forces and moments are
computed, and where design code checks are performed, may be specified in previous
SECTION (Section 2.6) commands, or by using the AS BEAM, AS COLUMN, or AS
TRUSS options of the SELECT command as described below. If not specified in either
the SECTION command or the AS option of the SELECT command, the default
locations are the same as the AS BEAM option (i.e., the start, middle, and end of the
member).
Several important points should be noted in connection with the influence that
PARAMETER values will have on the member selection process as follows:
a.
The parameter 'CODE' is required and must be specified in a prior PARAMETER

command, or by using the "USE CODE" option of the SELECT command.
b.
If certain parameter values are not specified in a prior PARAMETER command,

then their defaults (i.e., default value or default action) will be used. Default
values or actions are described in the Appendices. The structural engineer must
be aware of the value of all parameters used during member selection, of any
default values used or default actions taken, and of the influence that each
parameter value will have on the member selection process.
c.
Information created by the member selection process such as the results of

specific design code provision checks (e.g., actual and allowable stresses,
interaction equation values, etc.) may be output following the SELECT command,
or they may be stored for use at some later time. The SUMMARIZE and TRACE
parameters may be used to control the display and storing of such information.
Care should be exercised when using the SUMMARIZE parameter since for each
member that the SUMMARIZE parameter has been set, it will cause each
2 - 35
SELECT Command
Steel Design
subsequent SELECT and CHECK command to save the results of a very large
number of internal code check computations performed at each location along
each such member, and for each active loading condition.
All active and inactive members named in "list1", or implied by the ALL MEMBERS
option, will be selected. Any finite element names given will be ignored. It is important
to note that members will be selected in the order that their names appear in list1, or
according to the internal order of member names (GTSTRUDL User Guide: Analysis,
Section 12.2) if the ALL MEMBER or ALL MEMBER BUT options are given. The order
in which members are selected becomes important if relational member constraints
were specified in a prior MEMBER CONSTRAINTS command (Section 2.5). For
example, if a property of member 10 is constrained by a property of member 20, then
member 20 should be selected before member 10 is selected.
For each currently active static loading condition for which analysis results have been
computed or created, and at each specified or default location along each member
given in "list1" or implied by the ALL MEMBERS option, member selection will be
performed as follows:
a.
Internal member forces and moments are computed.
b.
The lightest weight steel rolled shape is selected from a specified table of steel
rolled shapes. Design is performed in accordance with all previously specified
PARAMETER values, with all previously specified MEMBER CONSTRAINTS,
and with the provisions of a design code specified by the SELECT command or
a prior PARAMETER command.
c.
As each new shape is selected for a member, the member's previous cross
section shape properties are replaced by the properties of the selected shape.
It should be noted that any subsequent analysis will use the latest member
properties.
d.
The SELECT command will cause certain results computed during the member
selection process, as well as other information, to be output. The type of
information that is output is controlled by the current value of the 'TRACE'
parameter. If no value of the 'TRACE' parameter was given in a prior
PARAMETER command, then the default value 4.0 is used for 'TRACE' which
causes the following information to be displayed following the SELECT command
and as shown in Figure 2.7-1:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Member name,
Design code pursuant to which code checking was performed,
Steel shape checked, and the name of the table to which the shape
belongs,
2 - 36
Steel Design
SELECT Command
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
The loading names, section locations along the members, and code
provision names associated with the two largest ratios of actual/allowable
code provision values,
The two largest ratios of actual/allowable code provision values,
The internal member section forces at the section location associated with
the largest ratio of actual/allowable code provision value,
The units of the TRACE output, and
The number of shapes checked against the requirements of the design
code provisions.
If a value of -99.0 is output as the value of a code provision, it may be due to one
of the following conditions:
(1)
A value of zero was previously specified for the yield strength parameter
'FYLD' or for the minimum tensile strength parameter 'FTS' (this will cause
the member code check to be terminated for this member),
(2)
An invalid value was previously specified for the steel grade parameter
STEELGRD. In this case, a value of zero will be set for the yield strength
parameter FYLD, or for the minimum tensile strength parameter FTS (this
will cause the member code check to be terminated for this member), or
(3)
A negative or zero value was detected in the denominator of the combined

stress equation 1.6 of the 1978 AISC or equation H1-1 of the AISC ASD
Ninth Edition code.
2 - 37
SELECT Command
$
SELECT
MEMBERS
Steel Design
TO
***************************
* DESIGN TRACE OUTPUT *
***************************
JOBID - MS188 TITLE - EXAMPLE
** CODE UNITS ARE USED FOR ALL SECTION FORCES **

** MEMBERS WHICH FAIL ARE MARKED BY TWO ASTERISKS (**) **
** SECTION FORCES SHOWN ARE FOR FIRST LOADING AND SECTION **
MEMBER
PROFILE
LOADING
SECTION
PROVISION
ACTUAL/
SECTION FORCES
UNITS
CODE
TABLE
NAME
LOCATION
NAME
ALLOWABLE
FX/MT FY/MY
FZ/MZ
TRIALS
/---------------/------------------/-------------/------------------/------------------/-----------------/
1
ASD9
W21X62
WSHAPES9
5
4
120.000
120.000
H1-1 COM
H1-2 COM
0.98262
0.93078
-180.000 108.494
0.000 INCH KIP
0.000
0.000 -2181.938 12
2
ASD9
W21X68
WSHAPES9
5
5
0.000
120.000
H1-1 COM
H1-1 COM
0.90841
0.90176
-180.000 -97.550
0.000 INCH KIP
0.000
0.000 -2181.938 16
3
ASD9
W21X62
WSHAPES9
5
4
0.000
0.000
H1-1 COM
H1-2 COM
0.97569
0.93078
-180.000 -108.255
0.000 INCH KIP
0.000
0.000 -2153.318 12
****************************
* END OF TRACE OUTPUT
*
****************************
$
Figure 2.7-1 TRACE 4 output from SELECT Commands
2 - 38
Steel Design
SELECT Command
The "AS" option: The AS option of the SELECT command provides a convenient
way of specifying section locations along a member. When specified, the locations
implied by the AS option take precedence over any location values given in a prior
SECTION command for the member. The AS option operates as follows:
AS BEAM: This option specifies 3 section locations (fractional distances of 0.0, 0.5,
and 1.0 of the member length) along the member at which internal section forces
(such as those computed by the LIST SECTION FORCES command) shall be
computed and the code checks performed.
AS COLUMN: This option specifies 2 section locations (fractional distances of 0.0
and 1.0 of the member length) along the member at which internal section forces
(such as those computed by the LIST SECTION FORCES command) shall be
AS TRUSS: This option specifies 1 section location (fractional distance of 1.0 of the
member length) along the member at which internal section forces (such as those
computed by the LIST SECTION FORCES command) shall be computed and the
code checks performed.
AS BEAM n1, or AS COLUMN n2: This option specifies n1 or n2 equally spaced
section locations along the member (including the 0.0 and 1.0 locations) at which
internal section forces (such as those computed and output by the LIST SECTION
FORCES command) shall be computed and the code checks performed. If the
value of n1 or n2 is 1 or 2, then the forces acting on the start face, or start and end
faces, of the member (such as those output by a LIST FORCES command) are used
in the code checks (rather than the internal section forces acting at the 0.0 and 1.0
locations along the member). This only has significance when there is a
concentrated force or moment member load applied directly at the start or end of the
member. In this case, special attention should be given to the proper choice of
locations along the member at which code checks are to be performed.
The "USE CODE" Option: The USE CODE option of the SELECT command is an
alternate way of specifying the CODE parameter value codename, and it is used in
the same way as it is used if given in a PARAMETERS command (Section 2.2).
CHANGES and DELETIONS Modes

The SELECT command is mode independent. That is, it operates the same in any
mode. However, if SELECT is given in the CHANGES or DELETIONS modes, it will
automatically change the command processing mode to the ADDITIONS mode.
2 - 39
SELECT Command
Steel Design
Extended Example
STIFFNESS ANALYSIS
PARAMETERS
TBLNAM WCOLUMN9 MEMBERS 201 TO 250, 350 TO 375
FRUNLCF 0.5 MEMBERS 1 TO 10
KY 1.5 MEMBERS 201 TO 250, 350 TO 375
KZ 2.1 MEMBERS 201 TO 250, 350 TO 375
UNITS CM
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
$ Constrain members 1 to 10 to have depths less than or equal to 45
$ CM and greater than 20 CM, and to have flange widths less than 27
$ CM.
$ Constrain the area of members 201 to 250 to be greater than or
$ equal to the maximum area of members 350 to 375.
C
C $ Other commands
C
SECTION FRACT NS 5 0.0 0.2 0.6 0.75 1.0
SECTION FR NS 3 0.0 0.7 1.0 MEMBERS 350 TO 375
SELECT MEMBERS 1 TO 10
2 - 40
Steel Design
2.8
TAKE Command
TAKE Command
command elements,
list1
list (GTSTRUDL User Guide: Analysis, Section 4.1) of member names to

be modified according to the modification criterion.
list2
list of member names from which a member is chosen according to the

modification criterion.
'a'
the name of the steel cross-section dimension or property upon which the
modification criterion is based. These are the same as the dimensions and
properties which may be constrained (Section 2.5 and Table 2.5-1).
the name of the member whose properties become the properties of the
members named in list1.
member
Example
SELECT MEMBERS 1 TO 100 AS BEAM
$
TAKE MEMBERS 1 TO 21 AS LARGEST 'SZ' OF MEMBERS 1 TO 21
TAKE MEMBERS 151 TO 161 SAME AS MEMBER 51
TAKE MEMBERS 501 TO 511 AS LARGEST 'AX' OF MEMBS 501 TO 511
Explanation
In general, following a SELECT command (Section 2.7), most or all of the selected
members will be of different section sizes. However, from the point of view of
fabrication cost, connection detailing, ease of construction, and other factors, it may be
unacceptable when there are too many different section sizes. The TAKE command
permits the engineer to "smooth" (i.e., modify) the design created by a previous
member selection process in order to make it more feasible from a constructability/cost
point of view.
2 - 41
TAKE Command
Steel Design
It is useful to note that there are two other special commands that may be more
convenient to use than the TAKE command which are the DEFINE PHYSICAL
MEMBER and SMOOTH PHYSICAL MEMBERS commands as described in the
GTSTRUDL User Guide: Analysis, Section 4.25.
Now, when given, the TAKE command immediately performs the requested actions
according to one of three modification criteria as follows:
SAME AS memberi:
This form of the TAKE command changes the sizes of the members given in list1 to be
the same as the section size of memberi. All properties for the members named in list1
are updated in the GTSTRUDL Data Base.
Example:
AS LARGEST 'a' OF MEMBERS list2:
This form of the TAKE command causes the properties of all members named in list1
to be changed to be the same as the one member named in list2 that has the largest
cross-section property 'a'.
Example:
TAKE MEMBERS 1 TO 20 AS LARGEST 'AX' OF MEMBERS 1 TO 20
AS SMALLEST 'a' OF MEMBERS list2:
This form of the TAKE command causes the properties of all members named in list1
to be changed to be the same as the one member named in list2 that has the smallest
cross-section property 'a'.
Example:
TAKE MEMBERS 101 TO 120 AS SMALLEST 'ZD' OF MEMBS 101 TO 120
Following the TAKE command, the engineer would normally iterate back to analysis by
specifying another STIFFNESS ANALYSIS command, followed by another CHECK
command. This CHECK command would then perform a code check based on the
current member sizes, and also based on the latest analysis results which are
associated with the current member sizes (the member sizes caused by the previous
SELECT and TAKE commands).
2 - 42
Steel Design
TAKE Command

The TAKE command operates the same in all three command modes.
Extended Example
STIFFNESS ANALYSIS
$
PARAMETERS
KY 1.5 MEMBERS 201 TO 250, 350 TO 375
KZ 2.1 MEMBERS 201 TO 250, 350 TO 375
$
UNITS CM
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
$
$ Constrain members 1 to 10 to have depths less than or equal to 45 CM
$ and greater than 20 CM, and to have flange widths less than 27 CM.
$
$
$ Constrain the area of members 201 to 250 to be greater than or equal to
$ the maximum area of members 350 to 375.
$
C
C $ Other commands
C
SECTION FRACT NS 5 0.0 0.2 0.6 0.75 1.0
$
SELECT MEMBERS 201 TO 250 AS COLUMNS
2 - 43
TAKE Command
Steel Design
TAKE MEMBERS 1 TO 10 AS LARGEST 'SZ' OF MEMBERS 1 TO 10

TAKE MEMBERS 201 TO 211 AS LARGEST 'AX' OF MEMBS 201 TO 211
$
$
LOAD LIST ALL
STIFFNESS ANALYSIS
CHECK CODE MEMBERS 201 TO 250 AS COLUMNS
$
2 - 44
Steel Design
2.9
CHECK Command
CHECK Command
command elements,
list1
= list of member names to be checked for satisfaction of design code

requirements and/or member constraints.
list2
= list of member names to be excluded from the check process.
n1
= optional number (maximum of 50) of equally spaced section locations along

the members, including the start and end locations, at which design code
and constraint checks will be performed. The default value is 3 (i.e., start,
middle, and end locations along the members).
n2
= same as n1 except that the default value is 2 (i.e., start and end locations
along the members).
'codename'
= name of a specific design code available in GTSTRUDL, and pursuant to

which the specified members will be checked. Available design code
names are given in Appendix A.
Note: 'codename' must be given either in the CHECK command including
the single quotes, or given in a prior PARAMETERS command without the
single quotes.
2 - 45
CHECK Command
Steel Design
Example
SECTION FR NS 5 0.0 0.333 0.65 0.80 1.0 MEMBERS 1 TO 11 BY 2
CHECK CODE MEMBERS 1 TO 11 BY 2
CHECK CODE MEMBERS 2 TO 12 BY 2 AS BEAM 11
CHECK CODE AND CONSTRAINTS MEMBERS 101 TO 110 AS COLUMN
Explanation
The CHECK command causes an existing steel rolled shape to be checked against the
provisions of a specified design code specification and/or to be checked against a
previously specified set of member constraints. Only members whose properties are
defined as TABLE properties may be checked. A member with TABLE properties is
one which was specified in a previous MEMBER PROPERTIES command as a TABLE
shape, or one which was previously designed by a SELECT command.
Member code checks are based on the results of existing member force and moment
analysis results. The member analysis results upon which steel design is based must
be those that are stored in the GTSTRUDL data base as static analysis results (e.g.,
those created by prior STIFFNESS ANALYSIS, CREATE LOADING COMBINATION,
COMBINE, and CREATE PSEUDO STATIC LOADING commands).
Member constraint checks are based on member constraints specified in prior
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS commands.
The specific locations along a member where internal member forces and moments are
computed, and where design code checks are performed, may be specified in previous
SECTION (Section 2.6) commands, or by using the AS BEAM, AS COLUMN, or AS
TRUSS options of the CHECK command as described below. If not specified in either
the SECTION command or the AS option of the CHECK command, the default
locations are the same as the AS BEAM option (i.e., the start, middle, and end of the
member).
The most current PARAMETER values specified in previous PARAMETER commands
(Section 2.2) will be used during the member code checking process. The parameter
'CODE' is required and must be specified in a prior PARAMETER command, or
by using the "USE CODE" option of the CHECK command. Other important points
to note in regard to PARAMETER values are presented in Section 2.7.
All active and inactive members named in "list1", or implied by the ALL MEMBERS
option, will be checked. Any finite element names given will be ignored.
2 - 46
Steel Design
CHECK Command
For each currently active static loading condition for which analysis results have been
computed or created, and at each specified or default location along each member
given in "list1" or implied by the ALL MEMBERS option, member code checking will be
performed as follows:
1.
Internal member forces and moments are computed.
2.
Pursuant to existing parameter values and the current TABLE shape size of the
member, and depending on whether a code check, or constraint check, or both
checks, have been requested, the steel shape will be checked against all current
constraints given in prior MEMBER CONSTRAINTS commands, and it will be
checked against the design code provisions considered by GTSTRUDL (as
described in Volumes 2A and 2B of the GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual) for
the specific design code given in the most recent 'CODE' parameter of a prior
PARAMETERS command, or in the USE CODE option of the CHECK command.
3.
The CHECK command will not modify the properties of the members being
checked. It only checks conformance to design code and constraint
requirements, and outputs the results of such checks.
4.
The CHECK command will cause certain results computed during the member
selection process, as well as other information, to be output. The type of
information that is output is controlled by the current value of the TRACE
parameter. If no value of the TRACE parameter is given in any prior
PARAMETER command, then the default value 4.0 is used for TRACE which
causes information to be displayed following the CHECK command which is
similar to the information output by the SELECT command as shown in Figure
2.7-1:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Member name,
Design code pursuant to which code checking was performed,
Steel shape checked, and the name of the table to which the shape
belongs,
The loading names, section locations along the members, and code
provision names associated with the two largest ratios of actual/allowable
code provision values,
The two largest ratios of actual/allowable code provision values,
The internal member section forces at the section location associated with
the largest ratio of actual/allowable code provision value, and
The units of the Trace output.
2 - 47
CHECK Command
Steel Design
It should be noted that if a member fails a code check, or fails a constraint check,
the failed member will be marked with double asterisks (**) preceding the
member name in the output following the CHECK command. In addition, at the
end of the output from the CHECK command, a summary of all member names
that failed the code or constraint checks is provided.
In addition, all member names that fail the code check are automatically
associated with a "Group Name" (GTSTRUDL User Guide, Analysis, Section
4.13). Default Group Names are 'FAILCK1', 'FAILCK2', ....., ........'FAILCK99'.
All such failed member names may subsequently be referred to by using the
Group Name to which all such names have been associated. For example,
following the first CHECK command, all failed members may be redesigned by
giving the following command:
SELECT MEMBERS GROUP 'FAILCK1'
It should also be noted that if a value of -99.0 is output as the value of a code
provision, it may be due to one of the following conditions:
a.
A value of zero was previously specified for the yield strength parameter
FYLD or for the minimum tensile strength parameter FTS (this will cause
the member code check to be terminated for this member),
b.
An invalid value was previously specified for the steel grade parameter
STEELGRD. In this case, a value of zero will be set for the yield strength
parameter FYLD, or for the minimum tensile strength parameter FTS (this
will cause the member code check to be terminated for this member), or
c.
A negative or zero value was computed for the denominator of the

combined stress equation 1.6 of the 1978 AISC Eighth Edition Code, or for
equation H1-1 of the 1989 AISC ASD Ninth Edition Code.
The "AS" option: The AS option of the CHECK command provides a convenient way
of specifying section locations along a member. When specified, the locations implied
by the AS option take precedence over any location values given in a prior SECTION
command for the member. The AS option operates as follows:
1.
AS BEAM: This option specifies 3 section locations (fractional distances of 0.0,

0.5, and 1.0 of the member length) along the member at which internal section
forces (such as those computed by the LIST SECTION FORCES command)
shall be computed and the code checks performed.
2 - 48
Steel Design
CHECK Command
2.
AS COLUMN: This option specifies 2 section locations (fractional distances of

0.0 and 1.0 of the member length) along the member at which internal section
forces (such as those computed by the LIST SECTION FORCES command)
shall be computed and the code checks performed.
3.
AS TRUSS: This option specifies 1 section location (fractional distance of 1.0

of the member length) along the member at which internal section forces (such
as those computed by the LIST SECTION FORCES command) shall be
4.
AS BEAM n1, or AS COLUMN n2: This option specifies n1 or n2 equally spaced

section locations along the member (including the 0.0 and 1.0 locations) at which
internal section forces (such as those computed and output by the LIST
SECTION FORCES command) shall be computed and the code checks
performed. If the value of n1 or n2 is 1 or 2, then the forces acting on the start
face, or start and end faces, of the member (such as those output by a LIST
FORCES command) are used in the code checks (rather than the internal section
forces acting at the 0.0 and 1.0 locations along the member). This only has
significance when there is a concentrated force or moment member load applied
directly at the start or end of the member. In this case, special attention should
be given to the proper choice of locations along the member at which code
checks are to be performed.
The "USE CODE" Option: The USE CODE option of the SELECT command is an
alternate way of specifying the CODE parameter value codename, and it is used in the
same way as it is used if given in a PARAMETERS command (Section 2.2).

The CHECK command is mode independent. That is, it operates the same in any
mode. However, if CHECK is given in the CHANGES or DELETIONS modes, it will
automatically change the command processing mode to the ADDITIONS mode.
Extended Example
STIFFNESS ANALYSIS
PARAMETERS
KY 1.5 MEMBERS 201 TO 250, 350 TO 375
KZ 2.1 MEMBERS 201 TO 250, 350 TO 375
2 - 49
CHECK Command
Steel Design
UNITS CM
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
$ Constrain members 1 to 10 to have depths less than or equal to 45
$ CM and greater than 20 CM, and to have flange widths less than 27
$ CM.
$ Constrain the area of members 201 to 250 to be greater than or
$ equal to the maximum area of members 350 to 375.
C
C $ Other commands
C
SECTION FRACT NS 5 0.0 0.2 0.6 0.75 1.0
$
LOAD LIST ALL
STIFFNESS ANALYSIS
CHECK CODE MEMBERS 201 TO 250 AS COLUMN
$
2 - 50
Steel Design
2.10
SUMMARIZE Command
SUMMARIZE Command
command elements,
2 - 51
SUMMARIZE Command
Steel Design
command elements,
list1 =
i1 i2 i3...in
list2 =
members for which summary data are desired

section numbers at which summary data are desired
loadings for which summary data are desired
Example
PARAMETERS
SUMMARY YES ALL MEMBERS
CHECK CODE ALL MEMBERS
SUMMARIZE CODE CHECK ALL MEMBERS
SUMMARIZE CODE CHECK MEMBERS 101 TO 121 BY 2 ALL POINTS
Explanation
The SUMMARIZE command allows the user to review the values of the provisions and
parameters used during a code check or selection of one or more members. Retention
of summary data (e.g., provision and parameter values) during the processing of a
SELECT or CHECK command will occur if the parameter SUMMARY has a value of
YES prior to the processing of the SELECT or CHECK commands. Summary data
output by the SUMMARIZE command are for the most recent SELECT or CHECK
during which the parameter SUMMARY had a value of YES for the members indicated
in the SUMMARIZE command.
Summary data are the provision and parameter values retained at each section along
a member, and for each currently active loading. For code provisions, the actual value,
allowable value and the ratio of actual to allowable are retained; for parameters, the
value used, either input, default, or computed, is retained.
Each code in GTSTRUDL has a "Summary Description" which identifies the provisions
and parameters used by that code. Section 2.12.5 describes the PRINT SUMMARY
DESCRIPTIONS command which can be used to review the "Summary Descriptions"
of the various GTSTRUDL steel design codes. Detailed descriptions of the provisions
and parameters of GTSTRUDL codes may be found in Section 7.2, Volume 2A, of the
GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual, and in the description of the applicable code (i.e.,
ASD9, TOWER2, etc). Parameter values are summarized in the Appendices of this
User Guide.
2 - 52
Steel Design
SUMMARIZE Command
Note that provisions with a value of -99.0 for the actual/allowable ratio in the summarize
output means that the member failed the code check due to one of the following special
reasons:
1.
A value of zero was specified for the yield strength, FYLD, or for the minimum
tensile strength, FTS.
2.
An invalid value was specified for the parameter STEELGRD. This causes a
value of zero to be computed for the yield strength, FYLD, or for the minimum
tensile strength, FTS.
3.
A negative or zero value was detected in the denominator of the combined stress
equation H1-1 of the AISC Ninth Edition code (GTSTRUDL's ASD9 code).
The different options of the SUMMARIZE command are described below:

CRITICAL SECTIONS:
CRITICAL SECTIONS is the default option, and the most concise. When CRITICAL
SECTIONS is selected, the largest and second largest actual to allowable ratio values
are output, with the section location and loading for which each occurred, and the
values of the four parameters at the point where the largest ratio occurred as illustrated
in Figure 2.10-1. The largest ratio is determined as follows:
1.
the actual to allowable ratios of provisions are computed, and the largest two are
retained for each loading at each section;
2.
the retained ratios are then compared for all loadings at each section, and the
two largest (i.e., controlling) at each section are determined;
3.
the controlling ratios at the sections are then compared, and the two most critical
ratios for the member and their locations are determined.
2 - 53
SUMMARIZE Command
Steel Design
SUMMARIZE CODE CHECK MEMBER 1 FOR CRITICAL SECTION
****************************
* DESIGN SUMMARY DATA *
****************************
JOBID - MS226 TITLE - TRACE, VALUES, AND SUMMARY EXAMPLE

STANDARD UNITS - INCH POUND RADIAN DEGREE F SECOND
*** NOTE:
1)
2)
3)
4)
PROVISION VALUES ARE GIVEN IN CODE UNITS SHOWN BELOW, WHEN APPLICABLE
PARAMETER VALUES ARE GIVEN IN STANDARD UNITS, WHEN APPLICABLE
WHEN CRITICAL IS SPECIFIED ONLY ACTUAL/ALLOWABLE RATIOS ARE GIVEN FOR PROVISIONS
MEMBERS WHICH DO NOT SATISFY ALL RELEVANT CODE PROVISIONS ARE MARKED BY TWO
ASTERISKS (**)
5) WHEN CRITICAL IS SPECIFIED PARAMETERS GIVEN ARE FOR MOST CRITICAL LOCATION
MEMBER PROFILE
RATIO
LOCATION CRITICAL PROVISION
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
CODE
TABLE
SECTION LOADING
NAME
RATIO
NAME
VALUE NAME VALUE
/---------------/----------------/------------------------------/-------------------------------------/------------------------------/------------------/
1
ASD9
W14X43
0.00
WCOLUMN9 0.00
DESLOAD H1-1 COM 0.9209

DESLOAD H1-2 COM 0.9091
CODETOL
KY
0.000
1.000
FYLD 50000.000
KZ
1.000
****************************
* END OF SUMMARY DATA *
****************************
Figure 2.10-1 Example output for SUMMARIZE FOR CRITICAL SECTION
2 - 54
Steel Design
SUMMARIZE Command
CRITICAL SECTIONS ALL VALUES:
CRITICAL SECTIONS ALL VALUES option allows the inspection of all the
computed provisions actual, allowable, and actual-to-allowable ratio at the
critical section in a tabular form (Figure 2.10-2). After the provisions, all the
parameter values used at the critical sections are output. This option provides
a complete description of the code equations for the critical section.
ALL POINTS:
The ALL POINTS option is the most general and presents all provisions and
parameters used at every section and loading for the requested members.
Presented in a tabular form, this information is arranged by section, then
loading for each member. For each loading at a section, all provisions of a
code are presented with the actual, allowable and actual-to-allowable ratio
values computed for the provision. After the provisions, the parameter values
used at that section and loading are output. The actual number of provisions
and parameters will vary between codes, but the output generated tends to be
quite large. This option does provide a complete description of the code
equations used and can be readily compared to hand calculations to verify the
results.
SECTIONS/ALL SECTIONS:
The SECTIONS and ALL SECTIONS options allow the user to inspect
SELECTED or CHECKED members at particular sections and loadings. In this
manner, the detail of the ALL POINTS option, or the conciseness of the
CRITICAL SECTIONS option may be focused on points of interest. Particular
sections along a member are identified by integer numbers referring to the
section locations used during the SELECT or CHECK command which
produced the summary data. Each location identified in the SECTION
command (Section 2.6) is assigned a number, starting with the number 1,
based on the order in which they are specified in the SECTION command.
2 - 55
SUMMARIZE Command
Steel Design
SUMMARIZE CODE CHECK MEMBER 1 FOR CRITICAL SECTION ALL VALUES

****************************
* DESIGN SUMMARY DATA *
****************************
JOBID - MS226
TITLE - TRACE, VALUES, AND SUMMARY EXAMPLE
STANDARD UNITS - INCH POUND RADIAN DEGREE F SECOND

*** NOTE:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
PROVISION VALUES
PARAMETER VALUES
WHEN CRITICAL IS
MEMBERS WHICH DO
WHEN CRITICAL IS
ARE GIVEN IN CODE UNITS SHOWN BELOW, WHEN APPLICABLE

ARE GIVEN IN STANDARD UNITS, WHEN APPLICABLE
SPECIFIED ONLY ACTUAL/ALLOWABLE RATIOS ARE GIVEN FOR PROVISIONS
NOT SATISFY ALL RELEVANT CODE PROVISIONS ARE MARKED BY TWO ASTERISKS (**)
SPECIFIED PARAMETERS GIVEN ARE FOR MOST CRITICAL LOCATION
======================================================
MEMBER 1
PROFILE W14X43
TABLE WCOLUMN9
CODE ASD9
UNITS INCH KIP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION NUMBER 1 DISTANCE FROM START OF MEMBER TO SECTION IS
0.0000 INCHES
**LOADING DESLOAD
-PROVISION-
**********************
-ALLOWABLE-
H1-1 COM
AXC TBEN
COMPACT
B5.1UNST
B5.1 B/T
F1-2
QS-COMP
C-E2-2
F1-6 C Z
F1.3 C Z
F4-1 Y
-ACTUAL-
1.000
1.000
1.000
13.435
9.192
85.930
1.000
1.000
30.000
30.000
20.000
0.921
0.638
12.000
7.500
7.500
120.000
1.000
51.886
19.139
19.139
2.400
-PARAMETER- -VALUE--PARAMETERFYLD
REDFTS
FRLZ
LX
UNLCFBF
50000.000
1.000
1.000
120.000
COMPUTE
-ACT./ALL.0.921
0.638
12.000
0.558
0.816
1.396
1.000
51.886
0.638
0.638
0.120
-VALUE- -PARAMETER-
KY
1.000
FTS
70000.000
LZ
120.000
COMPK
NO
CB
1.750
KZ
SLENCOMP
FLTORBUK
SDSWAYZ
CMZ
-PROVISIONH1-2 COM
C-H1-2 Z
B7 COMP
B5.1STIF
B5.1D/TA
QA-COMP
FE-FTEBS
E2-1
F1-8 C Z
F1-5 T Z
-ALLOWABLE1.000
1.000
200.000
35.780
36.540
1.000
1.000
21.778
30.000
30.000
-ACTUAL0.909
0.870
63.492
41.311
44.000
0.980
106.316
7.971
19.139
19.139
-ACT./ALL.
0.909
0.870
0.317
1.155
1.226
0.980
106.316
0.366
0.638
0.638
-VALUE- -PARAMETER- -VALUE- -PARAMETER1.000

COMPUTE
YES
YES
O.850
STEELGRD
FRLY
KX
FRUNLCF
REDE
A441
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
REDFYLD
LY
FRLX
UNLCF
-VALUE1.000
120.000
1.000
120.000
****************************
* END OF SUMMARY DATA *
****************************
Figure 2.10-2
Example output for SUMMARIZE FOR CRITICAL SECTION ALL

VALUES
2 - 56
Steel Design
SUMMARIZE Command
For example, in the SECTION command shown below, section number 1
would be at 0.5 of the member length, section number 2 would be at the start
of the member, and section number 3 would be at the end of the member.
SECTION FR NS 3 0.5 0.0 1.0
When one or more sections are identified with the SECTION or ALL SECTION
option, the user may request the loadings and amount of summary data
desired. The default load specification is CRITICAL LOADINGS. This load
option will output the largest and second largest actual/allowable ratio from
among all the loadings at each specified section. Also the output is for the
four parameter values for the critical loading at that section. The LOADINGS
and ALL LOADINGS options allow the user to request all provision and
parameter information at the specified sections for particular loadings.
Loadings named in "list2" must have been active during the SELECT or
CHECK command during which the summary data were recorded. Output
from the LOADING or ALL LOADING option follows the same format as the
ALL POINTS option but only for the identified sections and loadings.
Specifying "ALL SECTION ALL LOADINGS" option produces the same output
as the "ALL POINTS" option.
UNITS:
Unless otherwise specified, summary data is output in the standard units of
the design code for which the member was designed.
Certain summary data may be output in the current active units, but only for
those design codes for which the 'UNITS' parameter is allowed (Appendices
E to M). Such summary data includes the actual and allowable values of code
provisions, and the internal member forces and moments at the section under
consideration. In order to output such summary data in the current active
units for a member, the parameter 'UNITS' must be given a value of 'ACTIVE'
for the member.
It should be noted that parameter values are always output in the internal
units of GTSTRUDL (inches, pounds, radians, Fahrenheit, and seconds).
2 - 57
STEEL TAKE OFF Command
2.11
Steel Design
where,
Examples
STEEL TAKE OFF
STEEL TAKE OFF MEMBERS 1 TO 10
STEEL TAKE OFF ALL MEMBERS ITEMIZE
STEEL TAKE OFF ALL INACTIVE MEMBERS
STEEL TAKE OFF BY PROFILE NAMES
STEEL TAKE OFF ITEMIZE BY PROFILE NAMES
Explanation
The STEEL TAKE OFF command is used to compute the total weight and volume of
the specified members (finite elements are not included). The specified members may
be identified as a particular group of members with the 'active/inactive' option, or a
more selective group of members may be defined with the 'list' option. When no choice
is indicated in the command, ALL ACTIVE MEMBERS will be used as the default
option.
2 - 58
Steel Design
The STEEL TAKE OFF command outputs the total effective length (as discussed
below), weight, and volume of the specified members in the currently active units. The
STEEL TAKE OFF BY PROFILE NAMES command outputs the total length, volume,
and weight for each profile name (i.e., table shape name) and also the grand total
length, weight, and volume of the specified members.
The ITEMIZE BY MEMBERS option outputs the effective length, density, volume, and
weight of each individual member specified, and final total length, volume, and weight
in currently active units. The ITEMIZE BY PROFILE NAMES option outputs the same
data as above but it will be ordered based on the profile names (e.g., W12x58,
W14x61, W18x71). Members with the same profiles are output in a sequential order.
This option also outputs the total length, volume, and weight for each profile name and
the grand total length, weight, and volume of the specified members.
The effective length of a member will be computed in accordance with the following
rules:
(1)
For all cases not described below, the joint-to-joint length of the member will be
used. This is the usual case.
(2)
For members with eccentricities, the end-to-end length of the member will be
used.
(3)
For VARIABLE property members (GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual, Volume

1), the individual segment lengths will be used with a warning message being
printed if the sum of the segments differs by more than 1.5% from its joint-to-joint
or end-to-end length, whichever is appropriate.
(4)
For members with end joint sizes (GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual, Volume
1), the end joint sizes will be subtracted from the effective length which would
otherwise be used (note that DEAD LOADING includes end joint sizes).
The cross-section area (i.e., AX) member property for members referred to in a STEEL
TAKE OFF command must be given as either PRISMATIC, TABLE, or VARIABLE. The
densities need not be given prior to the STEEL TAKE OFF command. However, if not
given, GTSTRUDL uses a default value for DENSITY of 0.0.
If any finite elements are included in the specified list of members, a warning will be
printed once and the finite elements will be ignored. Only members are included in the
weight calculations of the STEEL TAKE OFF command.
2 - 59
PRINT Commands for Steel Design
2.12
Steel Design
PRINT Commands for Steel Design

The PRINT command for steel design is used to display (in a printed table form)
PARAMETER, CONSTRAINT, DESIGN DATA, and MEMBER PROPERTY information
from the GTSTRUDL Data Base. The GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual should be
referred to for a complete description of the PRINT options for steel design.
The PRINT commands described in this Chapter are as follows:
2.12.1
PRINT PARAMETER VALUES Command
2.12.2
PRINT CONSTRAINT CONDITIONS Command
2.12.3
PRINT DESIGN DATA Command
2.12.4
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES Command
2 - 60
Steel Design
PRINT PARAMETER VALUES Command
2.12.1 PRINT PARAMETER VALUES Command
command elements,
list1 =
list2 =
list3 =
a list (GTSTRUDL User Guide: Analysis, Section 4.1)

of joint names
a list of member names
a list of loading condition names
Examples
PRINT PARAMETER VALUES ALL MEMBERS
PRINT PARAMETER VALUES LOADS 1 TO 7 BY 2
Explanation
The PRINT PARAMETER VALUES command is used to display (in a printed table
form) the current values of steel design PARAMETERS which have been previously
specified by the PARAMETERS command. PARAMETER values may be output for
all joints or members, or for specified joints or members. Note that steel design
PARAMETER values are output in the currently active units.
2 - 61
PRINT CONSTRAINT CONDITIONS Command
Steel Design
2.12.2 PRINT CONSTRAINT CONDITIONS Command
command element,
list =

of member names
Example
PRINT CONSTRAINT CONDITIONS MEMBERS 101 TO 201 BY 5
Explanation
The PRINT CONSTRAINT CONDITIONS command is used to display (in a printed
table form) the current values of steel design MEMBER CONSTRAINTS which have
been previously specified by a MEMBER CONSTRAINTS command. CONSTRAINT
values may be output for all members, or for specified members. Note that steel design
MEMBER CONSTRAINT values are output in the currently active units.
2 - 62
Steel Design
PRINT DESIGN DATA Command
2.12.3 PRINT DESIGN DATA Command
PRINT DESIGN (DATA)
Explanation
The PRINT DESIGN DATA command is used to display all information displayed by the
previously described PRINT PARAMETER VALUES and PRINT CONSTRAINT
CONDITIONS Commands.
2 - 63
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES Command
Steel Design
2.12.4 PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES Command
command element,
list =

of member names
Example
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES MEMBERS 201 TO 250
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES MEMBERS EXISTING 1001 TO 1100
Explanation
The PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES command outputs the member properties given
by previous MEMBER PROPERTIES commands, or resulting from a previous steel
design SELECT or TAKE command.
2 - 64
GTTABLE
2.13
Displaying and Creating Tables of Steel Rolled Shapes
GTTABLE: Displaying and Creating Tables of Steel

Rolled Shapes
"Design" of steel members in GTSTRUDL involves the selection of shapes from
prestored tables of steel rolled shapes. Appendix D describes numerous such tables
which are included with GTSTRUDL distribution software.
However, it is often the case that additional tables of steel rolled shapes are required.
The GTTABLE program (included with GTSTRUDL distribution software) provides the
ability to create and modify such additional tables, and to permanently store them for
future reference. The GTTABLE Reference Manual should be referred to for a
complete description of all features of GTTABLE.
This Chapter provides a summary of the more often used features of GTTABLE as
follows:
2.13.1
GTTABLE: Displaying the Names of Existing Tables
2.13.2
GTTABLE: Displaying the Contents of an Existing Table
2.13.3
GTTABLE: Creating a New Table
2.13.4
GTTABLE: Creating a New Table From an Existing Table
2.13.5
How New Tables are Processed by GTSTRUDL
2 - 65
Displaying the Names of Existing Tables
GTTABLE
2.13.1 GTTABLE: Displaying the Names of Existing

Tables
FLIST i
command element,
i
causes a display of file names in the User Data Set
causes a display of file names in the GTSTRUDL

System Data Set
Example
TABLE Job 1' 'This is a GTTABLE job'
FLIST 1
FLIST 2
STRUDL Job 1' 'This is a GTSTRUDL job'

FLIST 1
FLIST 2
Explanation
The FLIST 1 and FLIST 2 commands (GTSTRUDL User Guide: Analysis, Section 4.8)
may be used with both GTSTRUDL and GTTABLE, and they are used to output the
names of tables of steel rolled shapes, in addition to the names of other types of data
files, contained in two special data sets which are as follows:
1.
User Data Set: This data set (default name of USERDAT.DS) is a READ/WRITE
data set that is created by the user of GTSTRUDL, and which contains files used
by GTSTRUDL as follows:
a.
User defined tables of steel rolled shapes used by the analysis and steel
design features of GTSTRUDL. These user defined tables are created by
using the GTTABLE software provided with GTSTRUDL. Sections 2.13.2
and 2.13.3 provide a summary description of the use of GTTABLE to
create such user defined tables.
2 - 66
GTTABLE

b.
User defined files containing dynamic transient loading records and

dynamic response spectra loading curves. These dynamic loading data
are stored through the use of the GTSTRUDL dynamic analysis commands
STORE TIME HISTORY and STORE RESPONSE SPECTRA commands.
The GTSTRUDL User Guide: Getting Started, describes how to make the
USERDAT.DS file a permanent file by using the "-udw" parameter on the DOS
"gtstrudl" or "gttable" command line.
2.
This data set (e.g., D:\Program

GTSTRUDL System Data Set:
Files\GTSTRUDL\9901\str9901.ds) is a permanent READ ONLY data set that is
included with GTSTRUDL and which contains files used by GTSTRUDL as
follows:
a.
Prestored tables of steel rolled shapes used by the analysis and steel
design features of GTSTRUDL.
b.
Various dynamic transient ground motion records (such as the ELCENTRO

acceleration vs. time ground motion), and response spectra curves (such
as several response spectra curves used in the dynamic analysis of bridge
structures).
c.
Steel and reinforced concrete design PARAMETER definitions.
d.
Finite element dictionary containing the names and processing rules for all
finite element types used by GTSTRUDL.
e.
Other relevant data.
2 - 67
Displaying the Contents of an Existing Table
GTTABLE
2.13.2 GTTABLE: Displaying the Contents of an

Existing Table
TABLE 'title of this GTTABLE job'

OUTPUT SUBSYSTEM TABLE 'gtstrudl_table_name' ALL
OUTPUT USER TABLE 'user_table_name' ALL
OUTPUT SUBSYSTEM TABLE 'gtstrudl_table_name'
PRINT ITEM NAMES
OUTPUT USER TABLE 'user_table_name'
PRINT ITEM NAMES
where,
gtstrudl_table_name =
user_table_name
Name of a TABLE of steel rolled shapes supplied

with GTSTRUDL
= Name of a TABLE of steel rolled shapes created
by the user
Explanation
The GTTABLE program may be used to output the contents of tables of steel rolled
shapes. Such contents include the name of each steel rolled shape stored in the table,
the specific cross-section area property names (such as AX, AY, AZ, IX, IY, IZ, etc.),
the unit type associated with each such property (such as [length], [length]2, [length]4,
[weight/length], etc.), and the value of each such property.
The following four examples show several ways in which the contents of a table may
be output.
2 - 68
GTTABLE
Examples
1.
Output Contents of a GTSTRUDL Supplied Table:

The complete contents (including all cross-section area properties) of a
table of steel rolled shapes supplied with GTSTRUDL (e.g., 'WSHAPES9')
may be output using the following commands:
$ ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TABLE 'Output the contents of the GTSTRUDL "WSHAPES9" table'
OUTPUT SUBSYSTEM TABLE 'WSHAPES9' ALL
FINISH
$ -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.
Output Contents of a User Created Table:

The complete contents (including all cross-section area properties) of a
user created table of steel rolled shapes (e.g., table 'SPECIAL') may be
output using the following commands:
$ ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TABLE
'Output the contents of the user created table called "SPECIAL" '
OUTPUT USER TABLE 'SPECIAL' ALL
FINISH
$ -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.
Output Steel Shape Names Contained in a GTSTRUDL Supplied

Table:
The names of steel shapes (not cross-section area properties) contained
in a table of steel rolled shapes supplied with GTSTRUDL (e.g.,
'WSHAPES9') may be output using the following commands:
$ ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TABLE 'Output shape names in the GTSTRUDL "WSHAPES9" table'
OUTPUT SUBSYSTEM TABLE 'WSHAPES9'
PRINT ITEM NAMES
FINISH
$ -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 - 69

4.
GTTABLE
Output Steel Shape Names Contained in a User Created Table:

The names of steel shapes (not cross-section area properties) contained in a
user created table of steel rolled shapes (e.g., table 'SPECIAL') may be output
using the following commands:
$ ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TABLE 'Output shape names in the user created TABLE called "SPECIAL" '
OUTPUT USER TABLE 'SPECIAL'
PRINT ITEM NAMES
FINISH
$ -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 - 70
GTTABLE
Creating a New Table
2.13.3 GTTABLE: Creating a New Table

New tables containing steel rolled shape names and their respective cross-section area
properties may be created by using the GTTABLE program. The following should be
noted:
1.
User created tables are stored in a special GTSTRUDL User Data Set. The
name of the User Data Set may be specified by the user. If not given, its default
name is "USERDAT.DS".
2.
Two types of member properties may be stored in the created tables as follows:
a.
Analysis Properties: The following cross-section area properties may be

used by GTSTRUDL for analysis: AX, AY, AZ, IX, IY, IZ, SY, SZ, YD, ZD,
YC, ZC, EY, and EZ. These properties are described in the GTSTRUDL
User Guide: Analysis, Section 8.1.
b.
Steel Design Properties: In order to SELECT (Section 2.7) or CHECK

(Section 2.9) steel rolled shapes for design purposes, certain cross-section
area properties, as well as certain other information, are required in
addition to those properties used for analysis purposes. However, the
additional required properties depend not only on the specific rolled shape
(e.g., I, Single Angle, Channel, etc.), but they also depend on the specific
design code specification (e.g., ASD9, BS5950, etc.) requested for design.
Such additional required properties are described in Appendix C for
each design code and for each steel rolled shape designed.
The following is an example of a GTTABLE batch job to create a user defined table:
Batch Mode of Execution of GTTABLE

The GTSTRUDL Installation and Operations Guide should be referred to for a detailed
description of all options available for a batch execution of GTTABLE.
However, the following is a short description of an often used subset of the procedure.
GTTABLE may be initiated in any valid Windows manner including by an icon, the Run
utility, the Start menu, etc. Upon initiation, processing continues with the opening of
the "GT TABLE - New Job" dialog box
2 - 71
GTTABLE
and where,
<Input File>
The name of a user created file which contains

the GTTABLE commands that are to be
processed during a batch execution of
GTTABLE, and where the first command in the
file is the TABLE command, and where the last
command in the file is the FINISH command.
<Output File>
The name of the file which will contain all output

created during the batch execution of GTTABLE.
<User Data File>
The name of a currently existing user created

data file which contains previously stored tables
of steel rolled shapes and their associated
properties.
If the currently existing user data file is opened in
a read-only mode (i.e., it cannot be modified),
then the data contained in the file may be
accessed by GTTABLE (such as by the OUTPUT
TABLE and PRINT commands).
2 - 72
GTTABLE

If the currently existing user data file is not
opened in a read-only mode (i.e., it can be
modified), then the data contained in the file may
be accessed by all GTTABLE commands (such
as by the ORDER and FILE commands).
If the <User Data File>" is not opened in a readonly mode, then:
a.
If the <User Data File>" does not currently

exist, it will be created and opened in a
read/write mode, and new data may be
written into the file by GTTABLE (e.g., in
order to create a new table of steel rolled
shape cross-section area properties), or
b.
If the <User Data File>" currently exists, it

will be opened in a read/write mode so that
existing data may be modified, and/or
additional new data may be written into the
file, by GTTABLE (e.g., in order to modify an
existing table, or to create a new table, of
steel rolled shape cross-section area
properties), and so that existing data may
be subsequently accessed as described
above .
Examples:
a.
Set the <Input File>" name to NEWTABLE.DAT, and the <Output File>
name to NEWTABLE.OUT, and the <User Data File>" name to
NEWDATA.DS in a read/write mode (i.e., the Read Only option is not
checked).
GTTABLE will be initiated in a batch mode. The GTTABLE commands are
contained in a file called "NEWTABLE.DAT", while the file which will
contain all output is called "NEWTABLE.OUT". A new user data file called
"NEWDATA.DS" will be created and opened in a read/write mode. The
GTTABLE commands in the file "NEWTABLE.DAT" will create new tables
containing steel rolled shape cross-section area properties, and store
these new tables in the user data file "NEWDATA.DS". These new steel
rolled shape cross-section area properties may be referenced in a
subsequent GTSTRUDL interactive or batch execution by the analysis and
design features of GTSTRUDL.
2 - 73

b.
GTTABLE
Set the <Input File>" name to OLDTABLE.DAT, and the <Output File>
name to OLDTABLE.OUT, and the <User Data File>" name to
NEWDATA.DS in the read-only mode (i.e., the Read Only option is
checked).
GTTABLE will be initiated in a batch mode. The GTTABLE commands are
contained in a file called "OLDTABLE.DAT", while the file which will contain
all output is called "OLDTABLE.OUT". An existing user data file called
"NEWDATA.DS" has been identified and will be opened in a read-only
mode. In the read-only mode, GTTABLE may output the contents of tables
in the file NEWDATA.DS, but cannot make any changes to such tables.
3.
GTTABLE will begin to execute in a batch mode by reading the GTTABLE

commands in the files called NEWTABLE.DAT or OLDTABLE.DAT, and writing
its output respectively to the files called NEWTABLE.OUT or OLDTABLE.OUT.
The GTTABLE commands in the files NEWTABLE.DAT or OLDTABLE.DAT must
begin with the TABLE command, and end with the FINISH command.
The use of GTTABLE in a batch mode only involves the use of commands (i.e., there
are no menu picks during a batch execution).
2 - 74
GTTABLE
TUTORIAL:
Batch Execution of GTTABLE
The following tutorial demonstrates the use of GTTABLE to create a new table of steel
rolled shapes in a batch mode. The GTTABLE commands are located in a text file
called "NEWTABLE.DAT", and all output is written to a text file called
"NEWTABLE.OUT" in the user's directory.
The following text data file called "UNICOL.DAT" was edited to contain the GTTABLE
commands which describe the name of the table, the names of the steel rolled shapes
in the table, and the cross-section area properties for each steel rolled shape in the
table:
$ -------File: "UNICOL.DAT" -------------------------------------------------------$ ----->>> This file is available upon request
*TITLE 'BUILD
TABLE
$ Note:
BRITISH
COLUMN TABLE UNICOL FOR
GTSTRUDL'
'Create the British table of column shapes called: "UNICOL" '

user-pw = an optional user defined password
DELETE USER TABLE 'UNICOL' 'user-pw' ALL

$
INITIATE USER TABLE 'UNICOL' 'user-pw'
$
UNITS CM KG
$
$
$***********************************************
$***********************************************
$**
**
$** The following headings and data are
**
$** ordered the same as published in the
**
$** following reference:
**
$**
**
$** Steelwork Design
**
$** Guide to BS 5950: Part I: 1990
**
$** Volume 1
**
$** Section Properties
**
$** Member Capacities (3rd Edition)
**
$**
**
$***********************************************
$***********************************************
$
$
2 - 75

ADD HEADINGS
'WEIGHT '
WEIGHT 1
'YD
'
LENGTH 1
'ZD
'
LENGTH 1
'WBTK
'
LENGTH 1
'FLTK
'
LENGTH 1
'INTYD
'
LENGTH 1
'BF/2TF '
'D/TW
'
'IZ
'
LENGTH 4
'IY
'
LENGTH 4
'RZ
'
LENGTH 1
'RY
'
LENGTH 1
'SZ
'
LENGTH 3
'SY
'
LENGTH 3
'ZZ
'
LENGTH 3
'ZY
'
LENGTH 3
'U
'
'X
'
'CW
'
LENGTH 6
'IX
'
LENGTH 4
'AX
'
LENGTH 2
'AY
'
LENGTH 2
'AZ
'
LENGTH 2
'YC
'
LENGTH 1
'ZC
'
LENGTH 1
'EY
'
LENGTH 1
'EZ
'
LENGTH 1
'YD/AFL '
LENGTH -1
'RT
'
LENGTH 1
'GRPNUM '
'SHAPE
'
'ND
'
LENGTH 1
$
ADD ITEMS
'WEIGHT '
'INTYD
'
'RZ
'
'ZY
'
'AX
'
'EY
'
'SHAPE
'
$
'356X634'
6.339
29.020
18.400
7108.000
808.000
0.000
1.000
'356X551'
5.510
29.020
18.000
6058.000
702.000
0.000
1.000
'356X467'
4.670
29.020
17.500
5034.000
595.000
0.000
1.000
GTTABLE
LENGTH
'YD
'BF/2TF
'RY
'U
'AY
'EZ
'ND
-1
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'ZD
'D/TW
'SZ
'X
'AZ
'YD/AFL
47.460
42.400
2.750
6.100
11.000 11580.000
0.843
5.460
225.910
435.307
0.000
0.145
35.600
45.560
41.850
3.100
6.890
10.900 9962.000
0.841
6.050
191.808
376.650
0.000
0.161
35.600
43.660
41.220
3.550
8.110
10.700 8383.000
0.839
6.860
156.303
318.768
0.000
0.183
35.600
2 - 76
'
'
'
'
'
'
'WBTK
'IZ
'SY
'CW
'YC
'RT
'
'
'
'
'
'
'FLTK
'IY
'ZZ
'IX
'ZC
'GRPNUM
'
'
'
'
'
'
4.760
274800.000
4629.000
38800000.000
23.730
11.789
7.700
98130.000
14240.000
13720.000
21.200
1.000
4.210
226900.000
3951.000
31100000.000
22.780
11.627
6.750
82670.000
12080.000
9240.000
20.925
1.000
3.580
183000.000
3291.000
24300000.000
21.830
11.450
5.800
67830.000
10000.000
5809.000
20.610
1.000
GTTABLE
'356X393'
'356X340'
'356X287'
'15215230'
'15215223'
3.930
29.020
17.100
4154.000
501.000
0.000
1.000
3.399
29.020
16.800
3544.000
433.000
0.000
1.000
2.871
29.020
16.500
2949.000
366.000
0.000
1.000
C
C
C
0.300
12.360
6.760
112.000
38.300
0.000
1.000
0.230
12.360
6.540
80.200
29.200
0.000
1.000
41.900
4.140
10.500
0.837
128.214
0.000
35.600
40.640
4.700
10.400
0.836
108.102
0.000
35.600
39.360
5.470
10.300
0.835
88.954
0.000
35.600
40.700
9.480
6998.000
7.860
266.992
0.209
3.060
146600.000
2721.000
18900000.000
20.950
11.297
4.920
55370.000
8222.000
3545.000
20.350
1.000
40.300
10.900
6031.000
8.850
230.516
0.235
2.660
122500.000
2325.000
15500000.000
20.320
11.183
4.290
46850.000
6999.000
2343.000
20.150
1.000
39.900
12.800
5075.000
10.200
194.180
0.270
2.260
99880.000
1939.000
12300000.000
19.680
11.068
3.650
38680.000
5812.000
1441.000
19.950
1.000
15.760
8.130
3.830
0.849
10.244
0.000
15.200
15.240
11.200
3.700
0.840
8.839
0.000
15.200
15.290
19.000
222.000
16.000
19.163
1.097
0.650
1748.000
73.300
30800.000
7.880
4.200
0.940
560.000
248.000
10.500
7.645
1.000
15.220
21.300
164.000
20.700
13.799
1.473
0.580
1250.000
52.600
21200.000
7.620
4.134
0.680
400.000
182.000
4.630
7.610
1.000
FILE TABLE
$
ORDER USER TABLE 'UNICOL' 'user-pw'
ORDER BY INCREASING 'AX'
ARRANGE 'SY' ON ORDERING 'AX' WITH ID 'AXSY'
ARRANGE 'SZ' ON ORDERING 'AX' WITH ID 'AXSZ'
ARRANGE 'ZY' ON ORDERING 'AX' WITH ID 'AXZY'
ARRANGE 'ZZ' ON ORDERING 'AX' WITH ID 'AXZZ'
FILE TABLE
$
OUTPUT USER TABLE 'UNICOL' FORMAT E ALL
$
$***********************************************
$**
**
$** The following commands can be used to
**
$** reorder the headings and data
**
$**
**
$***********************************************
$
PRINT HEADING 'AX
'IZ
'EY
'
'
'
'AY
'YC
'EZ
'
'
'
'AZ
'ZC
'SY
2 - 77
'
'
'
'IX
'YD
'SZ
'
'
'
'IY
'ZD
'ZY
'
'
'
GTTABLE
'ZZ
'WBTK
'U
'SHAPE
'
'
'
'
'RY
'INTYD
'X
'GRPNUM
'
'
'
'
'RZ
'BF/2TF
'CW
'
'
'
'RT
'D/TW
'ND
'
'
'
'FLTK
'YD/AFL
'WEIGHT
'
'
'
PRINT ITEMS FROM '356X634' TO '15215223'

FINISH
$ ----- End of file "UNICOL.DAT" --------------------------------------------------
2 - 78
GTTABLE

The file "UNICOL.DAT" contains the GTTABLE commands to be processed in
a batch mode, while the file "UNICOL.OUT" will contain a text listing of all
commands processed, in addition to the output caused by the commands.
The file "NEWTABLE.DS" will contain a new table called "UNICOL". The
UNICOL table contains the steel rolled shape names and cross-section
properties of British column shapes.
Excerpts from the output in file "UNICOL.OUT" are shown in Table 2.13.3-1.
2 - 79

Table 2.13.3-1
GTTABLE
Excerpts from the File "UNICOL.OUT" Containing the Output Caused
by the Commands in File "UNICOL.DAT" Shown in the Tutorial on the
Batch Execution of GTSTRUDL
C
C
C
{
1} > *TITLE 'BUILD BRITISH COLUMN TABLE UNICOL FOR GTSTRUDL'
{
2} >
{
3} > TABLE 'Create the British table of column shapes called: "UNICOL" '
0 ************************************************************
*
*
*
GTTABLE
JAN 1984
84.01-30 *
*
GGGG
*
*
GGGGGG
*
* GG
GG
TTTTTT
AA
BBBBB
LL
EEEEEE
*
* GG
TTTTTT
AA
BBBBBB LL
EEEEEE
*
* GG TTTTTT
TT
AAAA
BB BB LL
EE
*
* GG TTTTTT
TT
AAAA
BBBBB
LL
EEEE
*
* GG
GTT
TT
AA AA
BB BB LL
EEEE
*
* GGGGGGTT
TT
AAAAAA
BB BB LL
EE
*
*
GGGG TT
TT
AAAAAAAA BBBBBB LLLLLL EEEEEE
*
*
TT
TT
AA
AA BBBBB
LLLLLL EEEEEE
*
*
TT
*
*
TT
OWNED BY AND PROPRIETARY TO THE *
*
GEORGIA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY *
*
*
************************************************************
$$$ USERS OF GTTABLE PLEASE NOTE; FOR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
$$$ AND SAMPLE PROBLEMS TYPE "HELP"
{
{
{
{
****
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
4} >
5} > $ Note: user-pw = an optional user defined password
6} >
7} > DELETE USER TABLE 'UNICOL' 'user-pw' ALL
TABLE ERROR 2.3 - TABLE UNICOL
DOES NOT EXIST
8}
9}
10}
11}
12}
13}
14}
15}
16}
17}
18}
19}
20}
21}
22}
23}
24}
25}
26}
27}
28}
29}
30}
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
$
INITIATE USER TABLE 'UNICOL' 'user-pw'
$
UNITS CM KG
$
$
$***********************************************
$***********************************************
$**
**
$** The following headings and data are
**
$** ordered the same as published in the
**
$** following reference:
**
$**
**
$** Steelwork Design
**
$** Guide to BS 5950: Part I: 1990
**
$** Volume 1
**
$** Section Properties
**
$** Member Capacities (3rd Edition)
**
$**
**
$***********************************************
$***********************************************
$
$
2 - 80
GTTABLE
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
31}
32}
33}
34}
35}
36}
37}
38}
39}
40}
41}
42}
43}
44}
45}
46}
47}
48}
49}
50}
51}
52}
53}
54}
55}
56}
57}
58}
59}
60}
61}
62}
63}
64}
65}
66}
67}
68}
69}
70}
71}
72}
73}
74}
75}
76}
77}
78}
79}
80}
81}
82}
83}
84}
85}
86}
87}
88}
89}
90}
91}
92}
93}
94}
> ADD HEADINGS

>
'WEIGHT '
WEIGHT 1
>
'YD
'
LENGTH 1
>
'ZD
'
LENGTH 1
>
'WBTK
'
LENGTH 1
>
'FLTK
'
LENGTH 1
>
'INTYD
'
LENGTH 1
>
'BF/2TF '
>
'D/TW
'
>
'IZ
'
LENGTH 4
>
'IY
'
LENGTH 4
>
'RZ
'
LENGTH 1
>
'RY
'
LENGTH 1
>
'SZ
'
LENGTH 3
>
'SY
'
LENGTH 3
>
'ZZ
'
LENGTH 3
>
'ZY
'
LENGTH 3
>
'U
'
>
'X
'
>
'CW
'
LENGTH 6
>
'IX
'
LENGTH 4
>
'AX
'
LENGTH 2
>
'AY
'
LENGTH 2
>
'AZ
'
LENGTH 2
>
'YC
'
LENGTH 1
>
'ZC
'
LENGTH 1
>
'EY
'
LENGTH 1
>
'EZ
'
LENGTH 1
>
'YD/AFL '
LENGTH -1
>
'RT
'
LENGTH 1
>
'GRPNUM '
>
'SHAPE
'
>
'ND
'
LENGTH 1
> $
> $
> ADD ITEMS
'WEIGHT '
>_
'INTYD
'
>_
'RZ
'
>_
'ZY
'
>_
'AX
'
>_
'EY
'
>_
'SHAPE
'
> $
> '356X634'
6.339
>_
29.020
>_
18.400
>_
7108.000
>_
808.000
>_
0.000
>_
1.000
> '356X551'
5.510
>_
29.020
>_
18.000
>_
6058.000
>_
702.000
>_
0.000
>_
1.000
> '356X467'
4.670
>_
29.020
>_
17.500
>_
5034.000
>_
595.000
>_
0.000
>_
1.000
LENGTH
'YD
'BF/2TF
'RY
'U
'AY
'EZ
'ND
-1
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'ZD
'D/TW
'SZ
'X
'AZ
'YD/AFL
47.460
42.400
2.750
6.100
11.000 11580.000
0.843
5.460
225.910
435.307
0.000
0.145
35.600
45.560
41.850
3.100
6.890
10.900 9962.000
0.841
6.050
191.808
376.650
0.000
0.161
35.600
43.660
41.220
3.550
8.110
10.700 8383.000
0.839
6.860
156.303
318.768
0.000
0.183
35.600
'
'
'
'
'
'
'WBTK
'IZ
'SY
'CW
'YC
'RT
'
'
'
'
'
'
'FLTK
'IY
'ZZ
'IX
'ZC
'GRPNUM
'
'
'
'
'
'
4.760
274800.000
4629.000
38800000.000
23.730
11.789
7.700
98130.000
14240.000
13720.000
21.200
1.000
4.210
226900.000
3951.000
31100000.000
22.780
11.627
6.750
82670.000
12080.000
9240.000
20.925
1.000
3.580
183000.000
3291.000
24300000.000
21.830
11.450
5.800
67830.000
10000.000
5809.000
20.610
1.000
2 - 81

{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
95}
96}
97}
98}
99}
100}
101}
102}
103}
104}
105}
106}
107}
108}
109}
110}
111}
112}
113}
114}
115}
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
277}
278}
279}
280}
281}
282}
283}
284}
285}
286}
287}
288}
289}
290}
291}
292}
293}
294}
295}
296}
297}
298}
299}
300}
GTTABLE
> '356X393'
3.930
41.900
40.700
>_
29.020
4.140
9.480
>_
17.100
10.500 6998.000
>_
4154.000
0.837
7.860
>_
501.000
128.214
266.992
>_
0.000
0.000
0.209
>_
1.000
35.600
> '356X340'
3.399
40.640
40.300
>_
29.020
4.700
10.900
>_
16.800
10.400 6031.000
>_
3544.000
0.836
8.850
>_
433.000
108.102
230.516
>_
0.000
0.000
0.235
>_
1.000
35.600
> '356X287'
2.871
39.360
39.900
>_
29.020
5.470
12.800
>_
16.500
10.300 5075.000
>_
2949.000
0.835
10.200
>_
366.000
88.954
194.180
>_
0.000
0.000
0.270
>_
1.000
35.600
C
C
C
> '15215230'
0.300
15.760
15.290
>_
12.360
8.130
19.000
>_
6.760
3.830
222.000
>_
112.000
0.849
16.000
>_
38.300
10.244
19.163
>_
0.000
0.000
1.097
>_
1.000
15.200
> '15215223'
0.230
15.240
15.220
>_
12.360
11.200
21.300
>_
6.540
3.700
164.000
>_
80.200
0.840
20.700
>_
29.200
8.839
13.799
>_
0.000
0.000
1.473
>_
1.000
15.200
> FILE TABLE
> $
> ORDER USER TABLE 'UNICOL' 'user-pw'
> ORDER BY INCREASING 'AX'
> ARRANGE 'SY' ON ORDERING 'AX' WITH ID
> ARRANGE 'SZ' ON ORDERING 'AX' WITH ID
> ARRANGE 'ZY' ON ORDERING 'AX' WITH ID
> ARRANGE 'ZZ' ON ORDERING 'AX' WITH ID
> FILE TABLE
> $
3.060
146600.000
2721.000
18900000.000
20.950
11.297
4.920
55370.000
8222.000
3545.000
20.350
1.000
2.660
122500.000
2325.000
15500000.000
20.320
11.183
4.290
46850.000
6999.000
2343.000
20.150
1.000
2.260
99880.000
1939.000
12300000.000
19.680
11.068
3.650
38680.000
5812.000
1441.000
19.950
1.000
0.650
1748.000
73.300
30800.000
7.880
4.200
0.940
560.000
248.000
10.500
7.645
1.000
0.580
1250.000
52.600
21200.000
7.620
4.134
0.680
400.000
182.000
4.630
7.610
1.000
'AXSY'
'AXSZ'
'AXZY'
'AXZZ'
2 - 82
GTTABLE
{ 301} > OUTPUT USER TABLE 'UNICOL' FORMAT E ALL

************************
*TABLE OUTPUT UNICOL *
************************
HEADINGS
WEIGHT
YD
ZD
WBTK
FLTK
INTYD
BF/2TF
D/TW
IZ
IY
RZ
RY
SZ
SY
ZZ
ZY
U
X
CW
IX
AX
AY
AZ
YC
ZC
EY
EZ
YD/AFL
RT
GRPNUM
SHAPE
ND
TABLE
356X634
356X551
356X467
KG
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
1 CM
1
1
1
1
1
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
4
4
1
1
3
3
3
3
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
6
4
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
-1
1
CM
-1
DATA
WEIGHT
D/TW
ZZ
AY
RT
0.633900E+01
0.610000E+01
0.142400E+05
0.225910E+03
0.117890E+02
0.551000E+01
0.689000E+01
0.120800E+05
0.191808E+03
0.116270E+02
0.467000E+01
0.811000E+01
0.100000E+05
0.156303E+03
0.114500E+02
YD
IZ
ZY
AZ
GRPNUM
0.474600E+02
0.274800E+06
0.710800E+04
0.435307E+03
0.100000E+01
0.455600E+02
0.226900E+06
0.605800E+04
0.376650E+03
0.100000E+01
0.436600E+02
0.183000E+06
0.503400E+04
0.318768E+03
0.100000E+01
ZD
IY
U
YC
SHAPE
0.424000E+02
0.981300E+05
0.843000E+00
0.237300E+02
0.100000E+01
0.418500E+02
0.826700E+05
0.841000E+00
0.227800E+02
0.100000E+01
0.412200E+02
0.678300E+05
0.839000E+00
0.218300E+02
0.100000E+01
WBTK
RZ
X
ZC
ND
0.476000E+01
0.184000E+02
0.546000E+01
0.212000E+02
0.356000E+02
0.421000E+01
0.180000E+02
0.605000E+01
0.209250E+02
0.356000E+02
0.358000E+01
0.175000E+02
0.686000E+01
0.206100E+02
0.356000E+02
2 - 83
FLTK
RY
CW
EY
INTYD
SZ
IX
EZ
BF/2TF
SY
AX
YD/AFL
0.770000E+01
0.110000E+02
0.388000E+08
0.000000E+00
0.290200E+02
0.115800E+05
0.137200E+05
0.000000E+00
0.275000E+01
0.462900E+04
0.808000E+03
0.145000E+00
0.675000E+01
0.109000E+02
0.311000E+08
0.000000E+00
0.290200E+02
0.996200E+04
0.924000E+04
0.000000E+00
0.310000E+01
0.395100E+04
0.702000E+03
0.161000E+00
0.580000E+01
0.107000E+02
0.243000E+08
0.000000E+00
0.290200E+02
0.838300E+04
0.580900E+04
0.000000E+00
0.355000E+01
0.329100E+04
0.595000E+03
0.183000E+00

356X393
15215230
15215223
0.393000E+01
0.948000E+01
0.822200E+04
0.128214E+03
0.112970E+02
C
C
C
0.300000E+00
0.190000E+02
0.248000E+03
0.102440E+02
0.420000E+01
0.230000E+00
0.213000E+02
0.182000E+03
0.883900E+01
0.413400E+01
GTTABLE
0.419000E+02
0.146600E+06
0.415400E+04
0.266992E+03
0.100000E+01
0.407000E+02
0.553700E+05
0.837000E+00
0.209500E+02
0.100000E+01
0.306000E+01
0.171000E+02
0.786000E+01
0.203500E+02
0.356000E+02
0.492000E+01
0.105000E+02
0.189000E+08
0.000000E+00
0.290200E+02
0.699800E+04
0.354500E+04
0.000000E+00
0.414000E+01
0.272100E+04
0.501000E+03
0.209000E+00
0.157600E+02
0.174800E+04
0.112000E+03
0.191630E+02
0.100000E+01
0.152400E+02
0.125000E+04
0.802000E+02
0.137990E+02
0.100000E+01
0.152900E+02
0.560000E+03
0.849000E+00
0.788000E+01
0.100000E+01
0.152200E+02
0.400000E+03
0.840000E+00
0.762000E+01
0.100000E+01
0.650000E+00
0.676000E+01
0.160000E+02
0.764500E+01
0.152000E+02
0.580000E+00
0.654000E+01
0.207000E+02
0.761000E+01
0.152000E+02
0.940000E+00
0.383000E+01
0.308000E+05
0.000000E+00
0.123600E+02
0.222000E+03
0.105000E+02
0.000000E+00
0.813000E+01
0.733000E+02
0.383000E+02
0.109700E+01
0.680000E+00
0.370000E+01
0.212000E+05
0.000000E+00
0.123600E+02
0.164000E+03
0.463000E+01
0.000000E+00
0.112000E+02
0.526000E+02
0.292000E+02
0.147300E+01
ORDERING
ITEMS
15215223
15215230
15215237
20320346
20320352
AXSY
ITEMS
15215223
15215230
15215237
20320346
20320352
AXSZ
ITEMS
15215223
15215230
15215237
20320346
20320352
AXZY
ITEMS
15215223
15215230
15215237
20320346
20320352
AX
--CM
2
0.2920000E+02
0.3830000E+02
0.4710000E+02
0.5870000E+02
0.6630000E+02
C
C
C
=SY
ARRANGED ON ORDERING AX
AXSY
--CM
3
0.5260000E+02
0.7330000E+02
0.9150000E+02
0.1520000E+03
0.1740000E+03
C
C
C
=SZ
AXSZ
--CM
3
0.1640000E+03
0.2220000E+03
0.2730000E+03
0.4500000E+03
0.5100000E+03
C
C
C
=ZY
AXZY
--CM
0.8020000E+02
0.1120000E+03
0.1400000E+03
0.2310000E+03
0.2640000E+03
C
C
2 - 84
GTTABLE
AXZZ
=ZZ
ITEMS
15215223
15215230
15215237
20320346
20320352
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
302}
303}
304}
305}
306}
307}
308}
309}
310}
311}
312}
313}
314}
315}
316}
317}
318}
319}
320}

AXZZ
--CM
0.1820000E+03
0.2480000E+03
0.3090000E+03
0.4970000E+03
0.5670000E+03
C
C
> $
> $***********************************************
> $**
**
> $** The following commands can be used to
**
> $** reorder the headings and data
**
> $**
**
> $***********************************************
> $
>
> PRINT HEADING >_
'AX
' 'AY
' 'AZ
'
>_
'IZ
' 'YC
' 'ZC
'
>_
'EY
' 'EZ
' 'SY
'
>_
'ZZ
' 'RY
' 'RZ
'
>_
'WBTK
' 'INTYD
' 'BF/2TF '
>_
'U
' 'X
' 'CW
'
>_
'SHAPE
' 'GRPNUM '
>
> PRINT ITEMS FROM '356X634' TO '15215223'
HEADINGS
AX
AY
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
YC
ZC
YD
ZD
EY
EZ
SY
SZ
ZY
ZZ
RY
RZ
RT
FLTK
WBTK
INTYD
BF/2TF
D/TW
YD/AFL
U
X
CW
ND
WEIGHT
SHAPE
GRPNUM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
2
2
2
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
CM
-1
CM
CM
KG
6
1
1 CM
-1
2 - 85
'IX
'YD
'SZ
'RT
'D/TW
'ND
'
'
'
'
'
'
'IY
'ZD
'ZY
'FLTK
'YD/AFL
'WEIGHT
'
'
'
'
'
'
TABLE
GTTABLE
DATA
356X634
356X551
356X467
356X393
15215230
15215223
AX
ZC
ZY
INTYD
ND
0.808000E+03
0.212000E+02
0.710800E+04
0.290200E+02
0.356000E+02
0.702000E+03
0.209250E+02
0.605800E+04
0.290200E+02
0.356000E+02
0.595000E+03
0.206100E+02
0.503400E+04
0.290200E+02
0.356000E+02
0.501000E+03
0.203500E+02
0.415400E+04
0.290200E+02
0.356000E+02
C
C
C
0.383000E+02
0.764500E+01
0.112000E+03
0.123600E+02
0.152000E+02
0.292000E+02
0.761000E+01
0.802000E+02
0.123600E+02
0.152000E+02
AY
YD
ZZ
BF/2TF
WEIGHT
0.225910E+03
0.474600E+02
0.142400E+05
0.275000E+01
0.633900E+01
0.191808E+03
0.455600E+02
0.120800E+05
0.310000E+01
0.551000E+01
0.156303E+03
0.436600E+02
0.100000E+05
0.355000E+01
0.467000E+01
0.128214E+03
0.419000E+02
0.822200E+04
0.414000E+01
0.393000E+01
AZ
ZD
RY
D/TW
SHAPE
0.435307E+03
0.424000E+02
0.110000E+02
0.610000E+01
0.100000E+01
0.376650E+03
0.418500E+02
0.109000E+02
0.689000E+01
0.100000E+01
0.318768E+03
0.412200E+02
0.107000E+02
0.811000E+01
0.100000E+01
0.266992E+03
0.407000E+02
0.105000E+02
0.948000E+01
0.100000E+01
IX
EY
RZ
YD/AFL
GRPNUM
0.137200E+05
0.000000E+00
0.184000E+02
0.145000E+00
0.100000E+01
0.924000E+04
0.000000E+00
0.180000E+02
0.161000E+00
0.100000E+01
0.580900E+04
0.000000E+00
0.175000E+02
0.183000E+00
0.100000E+01
0.354500E+04
0.000000E+00
0.171000E+02
0.209000E+00
0.100000E+01
0.102440E+02
0.157600E+02
0.248000E+03
0.813000E+01
0.300000E+00
0.883900E+01
0.152400E+02
0.182000E+03
0.112000E+02
0.230000E+00
0.191630E+02
0.152900E+02
0.383000E+01
0.190000E+02
0.100000E+01
0.137990E+02
0.152200E+02
0.370000E+01
0.213000E+02
0.100000E+01
0.105000E+02
0.000000E+00
0.676000E+01
0.109700E+01
0.100000E+01
0.463000E+01
0.000000E+00
0.654000E+01
0.147300E+01
0.100000E+01
IY
EZ
RT
U
IZ
SY
FLTK
X
YC
SZ
WBTK
CW
0.981300E+05
0.000000E+00
0.117890E+02
0.843000E+00
0.274800E+06
0.462900E+04
0.770000E+01
0.546000E+01
0.237300E+02
0.115800E+05
0.476000E+01
0.388000E+08
0.826700E+05
0.000000E+00
0.116270E+02
0.841000E+00
0.226900E+06
0.395100E+04
0.675000E+01
0.605000E+01
0.227800E+02
0.996200E+04
0.421000E+01
0.311000E+08
0.678300E+05
0.000000E+00
0.114500E+02
0.839000E+00
0.183000E+06
0.329100E+04
0.580000E+01
0.686000E+01
0.218300E+02
0.838300E+04
0.358000E+01
0.243000E+08
0.553700E+05
0.000000E+00
0.112970E+02
0.837000E+00
0.146600E+06
0.272100E+04
0.492000E+01
0.786000E+01
0.209500E+02
0.699800E+04
0.306000E+01
0.189000E+08
0.560000E+03
0.000000E+00
0.420000E+01
0.849000E+00
0.174800E+04
0.733000E+02
0.940000E+00
0.160000E+02
0.788000E+01
0.222000E+03
0.650000E+00
0.308000E+05
0.400000E+03
0.000000E+00
0.413400E+01
0.840000E+00
0.125000E+04
0.526000E+02
0.680000E+00
0.207000E+02
0.762000E+01
0.164000E+03
0.580000E+00
0.212000E+05
{ 321} >
{ 322} > FINISH
BUILD BRITISH COLUMN TABLE UNICOL FOR GTSTRUDL
---------------------- RUN-TIME PERFORMANCE SUMMARY ----------------------CPU Time
00:00:00.08
Elapsed Time
0 00:00:01
On
Tue Aug 19 05:02:23 1997
2 - 86
GTTABLE
Creating a New Table from an Existing Table
2.13.4 GTTABLE: Creating a New Table From an

Existing Table
From time to time it may be useful to create a new table of steel rolled shapes which
is a subset of existing tables. The GTTABLE User Manual describes the details of how
to create such new tables.
The following is an example of the creation of a user table called "W16/W21" which
contains all W16 and W21 shapes taken from the GTSTRUDL Subsystem table called
"WSHAPES9":
The following text data file called "NEWTABLE.DAT" was edited to contain the
GTTABLE commands which describe the name of the new table, the name of the
GTSTRUDL Subsystem table from which steel shapes are to be transferred, and the
names of the steel rolled shapes to be transferred:
$ --------
File: "NEWTABLE.DAT" --------------------------------------------------------
*TITLE 'TRANSFER STEEL SHAPES FROM GTSTRUDL SUBSYSTEM TABLE

WSHAPES9 TO USER TABLE W16/W21'
TABLE 'CREATE USER TABLE "W16/W21" FROM SUBSYSTEM TABLE
"WSHAPES9" '
$
TRANSFER SUBSYSTEM TABLE 'WSHAPES9' TO USER TABLE 'W16/W21'
TRANSFER ITEMS FROM 'W16X100' TO 'W16X26'
TRANSFER ITEMS FROM 'W21X402' TO 'W21X44'
FILE TABLE
$
ORDER USER TABLE 'W16/W21'
FILE TABLE
$
OUTPUT USER TABLE 'W16/W21' ALL
$
FINISH
$ ----- End of file "NEWTABLE.DAT" ----------------------------------------------
2 - 87
Creating a New Table from an Existing Table
GTTABLE
The file "NEWTABLE.DAT" contains the GTTABLE commands to be processed

in a batch mode, while the file "NEWTABLE.OUT" will contain a text listing of all
commands processed, in addition to the output caused by the commands.
The file "NEWTABLE.DS" will contain a new table called "W16/W21". The
W16/W21 table contains the steel rolled shape names and cross-section
properties which were transferred from the GTSTRUDL Subsystem table called
"WSHAPES9".
2 - 88
GTTABLE
2.13.5 GTTABLE: How New Tables are Processed by

GTSTRUDL
New tables created by the user are processed by GTSTRUDL in the following manner:
1.
Assume that the user has created several new tables which are stored in the
"<User Data File>" (Sections 2.13.3 and 2.13.4).
2.
Tables of steel rolled shapes are referenced by using the "TABLE" option of the
"MEMBER PROPERTIES" command (GTSTRUDL User Guide: Analysis, Section
8.1).
3.
When a table is referenced by the MEMBER PROPERTIES TABLE command,

GTSTRUDL will do the following:
a.
GTSTRUDL will first search the <user data file> for the name of the
referenced table, and the name of the referenced shape name. If found,
the properties of the referenced shape contained in the <user data file> will
be used.
b.
If the name of the referenced table, or the name of the referenced shape,
is not found in the <user data file>, GTSTRUDL will then search the
GTSTRUDL Subsystem data file that is supplied with GTSTRUDL. If
found, the properties of the referenced shape contained in the GTSTRUDL
Subsystem data file will be used.
c.
If the name of the referenced table, or the name of the referenced shape,
is not found in the GTSTRUDL Subsystem data file, GTSTRUDL will then
output an error message that the table name or shape name does not
exist.
2 - 89
Steel Design Examples
2.14
Steel Design
Steel Design Examples

Data files containing the GTSTRUDL commands for each of the example problems
described in this Chapter are supplied with GTSTRUDL. These files are described as
Examples 7 and 8 in Table 3.1 of the GTSTRUDL User Guide: Getting Started manual.
The example problems described in this Chapter include the following:
1.
2.
Steel Design by the 1989 AISC ASD, Ninth Edition Steel Design Code (Example
1)
Steel Design by the 1993 AISC LRFD, Second Edition Steel Design Code
(Example 2)
Because of GTSTRUDL's robust command language, powerful data base management

facilities, and breadth of technical features, it is not feasible to show all the ways in
which GTSTRUDL may be used. Rather, the above examples are intended to show
how GTSTRUDL commands may be used to solve a few simple and straightforward
steel design problems.
2 - 90
Steel Design
Example Problem
Example 1
1989 AISC ASD Steel Design Example
Example 1 -
Steel Design by the 1989 AISC ASD Steel

Design Code
A plane frame structure example is shown in Figure 2.14-1. The GTSTRUDL commands
used to describe the structure, perform static analysis, perform design and code checks of
members by the 1989 AISC ASD, Ninth Edition, Steel Design Code, and output selective
results are shown in Table 2.14-1.
**************************************************************************************************
E=
29,000 ksi
(Steel)
Members
1, 2
3
4, 5
6, 7, 8
AX (in2)
50.
50.
55.
45.
IZ (in4)
5,000.
-----7,000.
10,000.
IY (in4)
-----2,000.
-----------
Figure 2.14-1 Example 1 - Steel Design by the 1989 AISC ASD Steel Design Code
2 - 91
Example 1
Steel Design
Example Problem
Table 2.14-1 Example 1 - Steel Design by the 1989 AISC ASD Steel Design Code
STRUDL 'EX. 1' 'STEEL DESIGN (BY 1989 AISC ASD CODE) OF A PLANE FRAME STRUCTURE'
$
$ Comments are shown following the "$" character
$ Geometry: Specify joint coordinates
$
UNITS KIPS FT DEGREES
JOINT COORDINATES
100
2 18
3 33
4 0 12
5 18 12
6 33 12
7 0 24
8 18 24
$
$ Support joints and special boundary conditions
$
STATUS SUPPORT JOINTS 1 2 3
JOINT RELEASES
2 3 MOMENT Z $ Pinned supports
$
$ Member type, topology (member incidences), and end boundary conditions
$
TYPE PLANE FRAME
MEMBER INCIDENCES
114
225
336
447
558
645
756
878
MEMBER RELEASES
7 START MOMENT Z END MOMENT Z $ Simply connected beam
$ Material properties and member BETA angles
$
UNITS INCH
CONSTANTS
E 29000
BETA 90. MEMBER 3
UNITS POUNDS FT
CONSTANTS DENSITY 490
2 - 92
Steel Design
Example Problem
Table 2.14-1
Example 1
Example 1 - Steel Design by the 1989 AISC ASD Steel Design Code
(Continued)
$ Member properties
$
UNITS KIPS IN
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 2 AX 50 IZ 5000
3
AX 50 IY 2000
4 5 AX 55 IZ 7000
6 7 8 AX 45 IZ 10000
$
$ Independent loading conditions
$
$ Note that the SELF WEIGHT command could be used instead of this DEAD LOAD
$ command so that recomputation of member self weights would be automatically
$ performed during a STIFFNESS ANALYSIS.
DEAD LOAD 'DL' 'SELF WEIGHT OF FRAME MEMBERS' DIRECTION -Y ALL MEMBERS
LOADING 1 'GRAVITY LIVE LOADS'
UNITS FT
JOINT LOADS
6 7 8 FORCE Y -30
MEMBER LOADS
6 FORCE Y LINEAR WA -1.5 WB -3.0 LA 5. LB 12.
6 MOMENT Z CONC M -25 L 14
7 FORCE Y CONC P -6 L 5. / P -9 L 10.
8 FORCE Y UNIF W -2.8
8 FORCE Y CONC P -20 L 6
LOADING 2 'WIND LOADS'
JOINT LOADS
4 FORCE X 15.
7 8 FORCE X 9.
$
$ Dependent loading conditions (loading combinations)
$
LOADING COMBINATION 10 'ALL GRAVITY LOADS' SPECS 'DL' 1.0 1 1.0
LOADING COMBINATION 11 '(GL + WL)*0.75' SPECS 10 0.75 2 0.75
LOADING COMBINATION 12 '(GL - WL)*0.75' SPECS 10 0.75 2 -0.75
$ Output problem statistics
$
QUERY
$
$ Perform static analysis for all currently active independent loading conditions,
$
and form all currently active loading combinations for which loading SPECS
$
have been given.
$
STIFFNESS ANALYSIS
2 - 93
Example 1
Table 2.14-1
Steel Design
Example Problem
(Continued)
$
Specify design parameters
PARAMETERS
CODE ASD9 ALL MEMBERS $ Use 1989 AISC Allowable Stress Design Code
TBLNAM WBEAM9 MEMBERS 6 7 8 $ Select beams from table WBEAM9
TBLNAM WCOLUMN9 MEMBERS 1 TO 5 $ Select columns from table WCOLUMN9
STEELGRD A36 MEMBERS 6 TO 8 $ All beams
STEELGRD A441 MEMBERS 1 TO 5 $ All columns
FRUNLCF 0.5 MEM 6 8 $ Maximum unbraced length of compression flange
FRUNLCF 0.333 MEM 7
COMPK KZ MEM 1 2 4 5 $ Compute kz for columns 1, 2, 4, and 5
SDSWAYZ YES MEM 1 2 4 5 $ Column sidesway uninhibited in plane of the frame
SDSWAYY NO MEM 1 2 4 5 $ Column sidesway inhibited normal to plane of the frame
KZ 1.0 MEM 3 $ Specify kz as 1.0 for pinned-pinned column 3
KY 1.0 MEM 1 TO 5 $ Specify ky as 1.0 for all columns
$
$
Define column lines for automatic k-factor computation
$
COLUMN LINE 1 MEMBERS 1 4
$
$
Define member constraints which constrain all columns to be
$
selected only as W12 OR W14 shapes.
$
UNITS INCH
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
1 TO 5 CONSTRAIN 'ND' LE 14.0
1 TO 5 CONSTRAIN 'ND' GE 12.0
$
UNITS FT
SECTION NS 4 0.0 7.0 14.0 18.0 MEMB 6
SECTION FRACT NS 4 0.0 .3333 .6667 1.0 MEMB 7
SECTION FRACT NS 4 0.0 0.3333 0.50 1.0 MEM 8
$
Activate design loading conditions
LOAD LIST 'DL' 10 11 12
$
Design Beams 6 7 8 for all ACTIVE loads
SELECT MEMBERS 6 7 8
2 - 94
Steel Design
Example Problem
Table 2.14-1
Example 1
(Continued)
$
Design Columns 1 to 5 for all ACTIVE loads
$
The kz effective length factor for each column designed will be computed based
$
on:
$
1. The current properties of the designed beams,
$
2. The current properties of the columns above and below the column being designed,
$
and
$
3. The properties of the current table steel shape being checked for code compliance
$
of the column currently being designed.
SELECT MEMBERS 1 TO 5 AS COLUMN $ Design based on start and end forces only
UNITS TONS
STEEL TAKEOFF
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
$ Smooth the design
TAKE MEMBERS 1 4 AS LARGEST 'AX' OF MEMBERS 1 4
TAKE MEMBERS 6 8 AS LARGEST 'SZ' OF MEMBERS 6 8
STEEL TAKEOFF
$
Recompute self weight of all members based on current members sizes
DELETIONS
LOADING 'DL'
ADDITIONS
DEAD LOAD 'DL' DIRECTION -Y ALL MEMBERS
$
Reanalyze the structure for all loading conditions
LOAD LIST ALL
STIFFNESS ANALYSIS
$ Output joint displacements in INCH units, and support reactions and member
$ end forces in KIPS and FT units, each ordered by loading condition
$ Note joint displacements and member end forces are output using 3-decimal
$ digits following the decimal point
OUTPUT DECIMAL 3
UNITS INCH
LIST DISPLACEMENTS
UNITS FT
LIST REACTIONS
LIST SUM REACTIONS
LIST FORCES
$
Output member end forces ordered by member
OUTPUT BY MEMBER
LIST FORCES
$
Output member section forces for all beams
LIST SECTION FORCES MEMBERS 6 7 8
2 - 95
Example 1
Table 2.14-1
Steel Design
Example Problem
(Continued)
$
Check code based on latest analysis results
LOAD LIST 'DL' 10 11 12
PARAMETERS
SUMMARY YES ALL MEMBERS $ Store code check results for all members checked
CHECK CODE MEMBERS 6 7 8
CHECK CODE MEMBERS 1 TO 5 AS COLUMN $ Check at start and end sections only
$
Save the current state of the data base for future processing
SAVE 'EX-1.SAV'
$ Terminate the GTSTRUDL session.
FINISH
2 - 96
Steel Design
Example Problem
Example 2
1993 AISC LRFD Steel Design Example
Example 2 -
Steel Design by the 1993 AISC LRFD,

Second Edition, Steel Design Code
A plane frame structure example is shown in Figure 2.14-2. The GTSTRUDL commands
used to describe the structure, perform static analysis, perform design and code checks of
members by the 1993 AISC LRFD, Second Edition, Steel Design Code, and output selected
results are shown in Table 2.14-2.
**************************************************************************************************
E=
29,000 ksi
(Steel)
Members
1, 2
3
4, 5
6, 7, 8
AX (in2)
50.
50.
55.
45.
IZ (in4)
5,000.
-----7,000.
10,000.
IY (in4)
-----2,000.
-----------
Figure 2.14-2 Example 2 - Steel Design by the 1993 AISC LRFD Steel Design Code
2 - 97
Example 2
Steel Design
Example Problem
Table 2.14-2 Example 2 - Steel Design by the 1993 AISC LRFD Steel Design Code
STRUDL 'EX. 2' 'STEEL DESIGN (BY 1993 AISC LRFD CODE) OF A PLANE FRAME STRUCTURE'
$
$
JOINT COORDINATES
100
2 18
3 33
4 0 12
5 18 12
6 33 12
7 0 24
8 18 24
$
$
STATUS SUPPORT JOINTS 1 2 3
JOINT RELEASES
2 3 MOMENT Z $ Pinned supports
$
$
TYPE PLANE FRAME
MEMBER INCIDENCES
114
225
336
447
558
645
756
878
MEMBER RELEASES
7 START MOMENT Z END MOMENT Z $ Simply connected beam
$ Material properties and member BETA angles
UNITS INCH
CONSTANTS
E 29000
BETA 90. MEMBER 3
UNITS POUNDS FT
CONSTANTS DENSITY 490
2 - 98
Steel Design
Example Problem
Example 2
(Continued)
$ Member properties
UNITS KIPS INCH
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 2 AX 50 IZ 5000
3
AX 50 IY 2000
4 5 AX 55 IZ 7000
6 7 8 AX 45 IZ 10000
DEAD LOAD 'DL' 'SELF WEIGHT OF FRAME MEMBERS' DIRECTION -Y ALL MEMBERS
UNITS FT
JOINT LOADS
6 7 8 FORCE Y -30
MEMBER LOADS
6 FORCE Y LINEAR WA -1.5 WB -3.0 LA 5. LB 12.
6 MOMENT Z CONC M -25 L 14
7 FORCE Y CONC P -6 L 5. / P -9 L 10.
8 FORCE Y UNIF W -2.8
8 FORCE Y CONC P -20 L 6
LOADING 2 'WIND LOADS'
JOINT LOADS
4 FORCE X 15.
7 8 FORCE X 9.
$ Factored limit state loading conditions (analysis and design loads)
FORM LOAD 11 'FACTORED DL' FROM 'DL' 1.4
FORM LOAD 12 'FACTORED DL+LL' FROM 'DL' 1.2 1 1.6
FORM LOAD 13 'FACTORED DL+WL FROM LEFT' FROM 'DL' 1.2 2 0.8
FORM LOAD 14 'FACTORED DL+WL FROM RIGHT' FROM 'DL' 1.2 2 -0.8
FORM LOAD 17 'FACTORED DL+LL+WL FROM LEFT' FROM 'DL' 1.2 1 0.5 2 1.3
FORM LOAD 18 'FACTORED DL+LL+WL FROM RIGHT' FROM 'DL' 1.2 1 0.5 2 -1.3
$
Output problem statistics
QUERY
$ Perform nonlinear geometric static analysis for all currently active factored limit
$ state loading conditions.
$
NONLINEAR EFFECTS
GEOMETRY ALL MEMBERS
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CYCLES 10
CONVERGENCE TOLERANCE EQUILIBRIUM 0.01
$
LOAD LIST 11 TO 18 $ Factored limit state loading conditions
NONLINEAR ANALYSIS
2 - 99
Example 2
Steel Design
Example Problem
(Continued)
$
Specify design parameters
PARAMETERS
CODE LRFD2 ALL MEMBERS $ Use 1993 AISC LRFD, Second Edition code.
TBLNAM WBEAM9 MEMBERS 6 7 8 $ Select beams from table WBEAM9
TBLNAM WCOLUMN9 MEMBERS 1 TO 5 $ Select columns from table WCOLUMN9
STEELGRD A36 MEMBERS 6 TO 8 $ All beams
STEELGRD A441 MEMBERS 1 TO 5 $ All columns
FRUNLCF 0.5 MEM 6 8 $ Maximum unbraced length of compression flange
FRUNLCF 0.333 MEM 7
COMPK KZ MEM 1 2 4 5 $ Compute kz for columns 1, 2, 4, and 5
SDSWAYZ YES MEM 1 2 4 5 $ Column sidesway uninhibited in plane of the frame
SDSWAYY NO MEM 1 2 4 5 $ Column sidesway inhibited normal to plane of the frame
KZ 1.0 MEM 3 $ Specify kz as 1.0 for pinned-pinned column 3
KY 1.0 MEM 1 TO 5 $ Specify ky as 1.0 for all columns
$
$
Define column lines for automatic k-factor computation
$
$
$
Define member constraints which constrain all columns to be
$
selected only as W12 or W14 shapes.
UNITS INCH
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
1 TO 5 CONSTRAIN 'ND' LE 14.0
1 TO 5 CONSTRAIN 'ND' GE 12.0
UNITS FT
SECTION NS 4 0.0 7.0 14.0 18.0 MEMB 6
SECTION FRACT NS 4 0.0 .3333 .6667 1.0 MEMB 7
SECTION FRACT NS 4 0.0 0.3333 0.50 1.0 MEM 8
$
Design Beams 6 7 8 for all ACTIVE limit state loads
SELECT MEMBERS 6 7 8 $ Design based on forces at specified section locations
$
Design Columns 1 to 5 for all ACTIVE limit state loads
SELECT MEMBERS 1 TO 5 AS COLUMN $ Design based on start and end forces only
UNITS TONS
STEEL TAKEOFF
$ Smooth the design
TAKE MEMBERS 6 8 AS LARGEST 'SZ' OF MEMBERS 6 8
STEEL TAKEOFF
2 - 100
Steel Design
(Continued)
$
Recompute self weight of all members based on current members sizes
DELETIONS
LOADING 'DL'
ADDITIONS
DEAD LOAD 'DL' DIRECTION -Y ALL MEMBERS
$
Redefine all factored limit state loading conditions using new 'DL' loading
LOAD LIST ALL
DELETIONS; LOADS 11 TO 18; ADDITIONS
FORM LOAD 11 'FACTORED DL' FROM 'DL' 1.4
FORM LOAD 12 'FACTORED DL+LL' FROM 'DL' 1.2 1 1.6
FORM LOAD 17 'FACTORED DL+LL+WL FROM LEFT' FROM 'DL' 1.2 1 0.5 2 1.3
FORM LOAD 18 'FACTORED DL+LL+WL FROM RIGHT' FROM 'DL' 1.2 1 0.5 2 -1.3
$
Reanalyze the structure for all factored limit state loading conditions
LOAD LIST 11 TO 18
NONLINEAR ANALYSIS
$ Output joint displacements in INCH units, and support reactions and member
$ end forces in KIPS and FT units, each ordered by loading condition
$ digits following the decimal point
OUTPUT DECIMAL 3
UNITS INCH
LIST DISPLACEMENTS
UNITS FT
LIST REACTIONS
LIST SUM REACTIONS
LIST FORCES
$
Output member end forces ordered by member
OUTPUT BY MEMBER
LIST FORCES
$
Output member section forces for all beams
LIST SECTION FORCES MEMBERS 6 7 8
$
Check code based on latest analysis results
PARAMETERS
SUMMARY YES ALL MEMBERS $ Store code check results for all members checked
CHECK CODE MEMBERS 6 7 8
CHECK CODE MEMBERS 1 TO 5 AS COLUMN $ Check at start and end sections only
$
SAVE 'EX-2.SAV'
FINISH
2 - 101
Steel Design
2 - 102
Reinforced Concrete Design
3.
Reinforced Concrete Design Commands

This Chapter describes a subset of the Reinforced Concrete Design commands as
follows:

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
Introduction to Reinforced
Concrete Design
Concepts
General Reinforced Concrete
Design Commands
MATERIAL REINFORCED
CONCRETE
METHOD
CONSTANTS
MEMBER DIMENSIONS
(PRISMATIC)
MEMBER DIMENSIONS
VARIABLE
GIRDER
Orthogonal Buildings
Modeling Commands
GRID DEFINITION
GRID MEMBER
FLOOR
WALL
END OF DEFINITION
FACE OF SUPPORT
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.9
3.9.1
3.9.2
3.9.3
3.10
3.11
3-1
Proportioning Reinforced
Concrete Members
DESIGN DATA
SLAB SUPPORTS for
Two-Way Slabs
JOINT DETAILS for
Two-Way Slabs
MEMBER SIMILARITIES
SEGMENT for Two-Way Slabs
PROPORTION MEMBER
DETAIL
ANALYZE and DESIGN
PRINT REINFORCEMENT
QUANTITY TAKEOFF
Interpretation of RC Output
Beam Output
Column Output
PDELTA Analysis Commands
SLENDERNESS
PDELTA LOADING
PDELTA ANALYSIS
DESIGN LOAD
Example
3-2
3.1
Introduction to Reinforced Concrete Design
Introduction to Reinforced Concrete Design

Reinforced concrete member design proportions the details of either the member crosssection dimensions, reinforcement bar sizes and locations, or both, based upon the
mathematical principles presented in the specified reinforced concrete design code.
Throughout the balance of this Chapter 3, the term "GTSTRUDL/RC" is used as an
abbreviation for reinforced concrete design in GTSTRUDL.
3-3
Reinforced Concrete Design Concepts
3.2
Reinforced Concrete Design Concepts
Fundamental Principles
The analysis and design of reinforced concrete members in GTSTRUDL conforms to
assumptions, specifications, and design practices in the American Concrete Institute
Building (ACI) Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, plus British Standards
(BS) Institution Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete. The user will
cause a particular code to be active with the METHOD command. The basic principle
followed in the design of reinforced concrete members is the ultimate strength design
(USD) method. Use of load factors and load factor combinations may be accomplished
most easily by using the LOADING COMBINATION command. The various codes
specify different load factors for USD; the user selects the load factors to be used and
correctly applies them in the LOADING COMBINATION command.
The strength reduction factors, Phi, specified by the ACI Codes, and the partial safety
factor, (Lambda)m, specified by the BSI Code, are included automatically in the design
process.
Frame Analysis and Member Proportioning

Member design is structured to work in conjunction with the GTSTRUDL frame analysis
capabilities and is designed to function accurately regardless of the orientation of the
structure with respect to the global coordinate system. However, GTSTRUDL/RC is
most easily and conveniently used if the structure is oriented such that the direction of
gravity is opposite the positive direction of the global Y axis. Other orientations require
special care with Beta angle specifications to ensure that the local y axis of beams, i.e.,
transverse load-carrying members, is parallel to the direction of gravity. Based upon
the analysis, GTSTRUDL/RC divides the beam into 20 or more sections and
determines locations of maximum positive and negative moment. These critical
sections are then designed for flexure. Cut-off and development lengths may be
determined on the basis of internal member forces and code requirements, and shear
and torsion reinforcement may then be designed for all sections.
Eccentricities between the location of a joint and the actual start or end of a member
are automatically accounted for in determining the section location when the MEMBER
ECCENTRICITIES command has been specified. Thus, sections are located from the
actual start of the member. A series of members spanning between column supports
may be combined for design by specifying them as a GIRDER.
Primary reinforcement is determined based on forces from linear static, dynamic and/or
PDELTA analysis. Shear reinforcement and special transverse confinement and joint
reinforcement are detailed according to the "non-linear" yielding criteria specified in the
code.
3-4
3.3
General Reinforced Concrete Design Commands
Introduction
GTSTRUDL/RC general commands are those used in preparation for the proportioning
and/or checking of reinforced concrete structures. These commands fall into the
following two categories: (1) the commands which are used to initiate the reinforced
concrete capabilities in GTSTRUDL; and (2) the commands which are used to describe
the material, design, and geometric properties of reinforced concrete members.
The first category includes the MATERIAL command which is used to initialize the
GTSTRUDL/RC capabilities and the METHOD command which is used to select the
design or checking procedure.
The second category includes the CONSTANTS, MEMBER DIMENSIONS, and
GIRDER commands presented in this Chapter 3, plus the MEMBER ECCENTRICITIES
command which is presented in the GTSTRUDL Users Guide: Analysis.
3-5
MATERIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE Command
3.3.1
MATERIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE Command
MATERIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE
Explanation
This command initializes the reinforced concrete capabilities and initializes the
standard values for the reinforced concrete material properties and design parameters.
3-6
3.3.2
METHOD Command
METHOD Command
Explanation:
The METHOD command is used to specify a design method, ACI or BSI code
specification, a table of steel reinforcing bar data and whether seismic or moderate
seismic design provisions should be considered.
All reinforcing bars are listed in Tables 3.3.2-1, 3.3.2-2, 3.3.2-3, and 3.3.2-4 are
assumed to be of the deformed type. Earthquake resistant design and detailing may
be accomplished according to ACI codes.
3-7
METHOD Command

TABLE 3.3.2-1. ASTM Reinforcing Bars
Bar Size
Nominal Diameter (in.)
Nominal Area (in.2)
Single Bars:
#3
.375
.11
#4
.500
.20
#5
.625
.31
#6
.750
.44
#7
.875
.60
#8
1.000
.79
#9
1.128
1.00
#10
1.270
1.27
#11
1.410
1.56
#14
1.693
2.25
#18
2.257
4.00
#3
.529
.22
#4
.714
.40
#5
.888
.62
#6
1.059
.88
#7
1.236
1.20
#8
1.418
1.58
#9
1.596
2. 00
#10
1.798
2.54
#11
1.993
3.12
#14
2.394
4.50
#18
3.192
8.00
Two-Bar Bundles1 Consisting of:
The diameter of a two-bar bundle is assumed to be equivalent to the diameter of a single

bar having the same cross-sectional area as the two-bar bundle.
3-8
METHOD Command
TABLE 3.3.2-2. Canadian Standard Reinforcing Bars
Bar Size
Nominal Diameter (mm)
Nominal Area (cm2)
Single Bars:
#10
11.3
1.0
#15
16.0
2.0
#20
19.5
3.0
#25
25.2
5.0
#30
29.9
7.0
#35
35.7
10.0
#45
43.7
15.0
#55
56.4
25.0
#10
16.0
2.0
#15
22.6
4.0
#20
27.6
6.0
#25
35.7
10.0
#30
42.2
14.0
#35
50.5
20.0
#45
61.8
30.0
#55
79.8
50.0

bar having the same cross-sectional area as the two-bar bundle.
3-9
METHOD Command

TABLE 3.3.2-3. UNESCO Reinforcing Bars
Bar Size
Single Bars:
#6
#8
#10
#12
#13
#14
#16
#18
#20
#22
#25
#28
#30
#32
#40
#50
#60
Nominal diameter (mm)

#6
#8
#10
#12
#13
#14
#16
#18
#20
#22
#25
#28
#30
#32
#40
#50
#60
Nominal Area (cm2)
6.00
8.00
10.00
12.00
13.00
14.00
16.00
18.00
20.00
22.00
25.00
28.00
30.00
32.00
40.00
50.00
60.00
.28
.50
.79
1.13
1.33
1.54
2.01
2.54
3.14
3.80
4.91
6.16
7.07
8.04
12.56
19.63
28.27
8.44
11.28
14.18
16.96
18.38
19.80
22.62
25.43
28.28
31.11
35.36
39.61
42.43
45.25
56.66
70.70
84.85
.56
1.00
1.58
2.26
2.65
3.08
4.02
5.08
6.28
7.60
9.82
12.32
14.14
16.08
25.12
39.26
56.54

bar having the same cross-section area as the two-bar bundle.
3 - 10
METHOD Command
Table 3.3.2-4 Korean Standard Bars
Bar Size
#6
#10
#13
#16
#19
#22
#25
#29
#32
#35
#38
#41
#51
Nominal Diameter (mm)
Nominal Area (cm2)
6.35
9.53
12.7
15.9
19.1
22.2
25.4
28.6
31.8
34.9
38.1
41.3
50.8
0.3167
0.7133
1.267
1.985
2.865
3.871
5.067
6.424
7.942
9.566
11.40
13.40
20.27
8.98
13.48
17.96
22.49
27.00
31.40
35.92
40.45
44.97
49.36
53.88
58.41
71.84
0.6344
1.427
2.53
3.97
5.73
7.74
10.13
12.85
15.88
19.13
22.80
26.80
40.54
Two Bar Bundles Consisting of:

#6
#10
#13
#16
#19
#22
#25
#29
#32
#35
#38
#41
#51
3 - 11
CONSTANTS Command
3.3.3
CONSTANTS Command
CONSTANTS
C
constant descriptions
C
C
command elements,
constant descriptions =
v1, v2, v3 ...
value of the specified constant. This value must be a decimal

number with a decimal point.
list1, list2,...
lists of member names.
FCP, FY, ..., EU
additional CONSTANTS required for reinforced concrete design as

specified in Tables 3.3.3-1 through 3.3.3-3.
3 - 12
CONSTANTS Command
Explanation:
Section 2.1.10.2, Volume 1 of the GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual describes how
material properties are specified in GTSTRUDL with the CONSTANTS command. In
GTSTRUDL/RC, the use of the CONSTANTS command is expanded to include the
specification of additional material and design properties which are required for
reinforced concrete design. Table 3.3.3-1 through 3.3.3-3 list these properties;
included are notations, the sections of the available codes which describe the
properties, and the default values of the properties which are assumed if the user does
not specify a value.
CONSTANTS values are specified in tabular form, i.e., one constant description per
line. The specification of a constant description on the same line with the word
"CONSTANTS" is optional. Any number of constant descriptions may refer to the same
material or design property; however, for duplicate constant descriptions, the last
applicable CONSTANTS value will be used.
There are three forms of input for CONSTANTS values. First, a value v1 may be given
alone, or optionally followed by "ALL MEMBERS," in which case the v1 is applied to all
members. When the v1 list1, v2 list2 ... form is given, then the values v1, v2, ... apply to
the members in list1, list2, ... respectively. Finally, the ALL BUT form is used when the
value v1 applies to most members, but values v2, v3, ... apply to the members in list2,
list3, ... respectively.
CONSTANTS values must be specified in the current active units. Often, FCP and FY
are the only CONSTANTS values which the user will need to set. The remaining
CONSTANTS assume the values shown.
3 - 13
CONSTANTS Command
TABLE 3.3.3-1. CONSTANTS and Assumed Values for ACI 318-89

CONSTANT
Explanation
ACI 318-89
FCP
Compressive strength of concrete, fc
FY
Yield strength of reinforcement, fy
WC
Unit weight of plain concrete
Assumed Value
4000 psi
9.4
60000 psi
145 pcf
(1)
DENSITY
Unit weight of reinforced concrete
FC
Allowable compression stress in concrete, Fc
VU
Ult. shear stress in beam with web reinf.
(2)
11.5.6.8
Allow. shear stress in beam with web reinf.
A.3.1(b)
RFSP
Splitting ratio, fct /
9.5.2.3
150 pcf
A.3.1
(3)
0.45(FCP)
(5)
6.7
FYST
Yield strength of stirrups
60000 psi
FYSP
Yield strength of spiral
60000 psi
FS
Allowable tension stress in primary reinf.
FSC
FV
Allowable compressive stress in column reinf.

Allowable tension stress in stirrups
20000 psi for

(4)
A.3.2
(5)
Grades 40, 50
24000 psi for
Grade 60
PHIFL
Flexure capacity reduction factor
0.90
PHISH
Shear capacity reduction factor
0.85
PHIBO
Bond capacity reduction factor
PHITO
Torsion capacity reduction factor
0.85
PHISP
Spiral column capacity reduction factor
0.75
PHITI
Tied column capacity reduction factor
0.70
BLFR
Ratio of max p, (p - p) or (pw - pf) to pbal
10.3.3
0.75
PMAXCO
Maximum allowable reinforced ratio in columns
10.9.1
0.08
PMINCO
Minimum allowable reinforced ratio in columns
10.9.1
0.01
PMINFL
Minimum allowable reinforced ratio in flexural

members
10.5.1
200/FY
ES
Modulus of elasticity for reinf. steel
8.5.2
29x106psi
EC
Modulus of elasticity for concrete
8.5.1
EU
Ult. strain in concrete at extreme comp. fiber
10.2.3
9.3.2
3 - 14
0.85
33(WC)1.5
0.003
CONSTANTS Command
Notes:
1.
The constant 'DENSITY' is the GTSTRUDL constant of the same name which
has been set to a value of 150 pcf for reinforced concrete.
2.
VU is multiplied by PHISH internally.
3.
Calculations for Vc and Tc are modified by replacing

RFSP/(6.7
) as per Section 11.2.1.1.
4.
The assumed value of FSC is also limited to 30,000 psi maximum.
5.
This value is defined only at the time of stirrup design.
3 - 15
with
CONSTANTS Command
TABLE 3.3.3-2. CONSTANTS and Assumed Values for BSI CP110-72
CONSTANT
Explanation
CP110-72
Assumed Value
FCU
Characteristic strength of concrete, fcu
3.1.4.2, Table 2
25 N/mm2
FY
3.1.4.3, Table 3
410 N/mm2
DC
Unit weight of plain concrete, Dc
2300 kg/m3
DENSITY
Unit weight of reinforced concrete (1)
2380 kg/m3
VU
Ult. shear stress in beam with links
3.3.6.1
3.75 N/mm2
VC
Max. ultimate concrete shear stress, vc
3.3.6.1
0.35 N/mm2
VTMIN
Max. ultimate concrete torsional stress in any

component rectangle, vtmin
3.3.7
0.33 N/mm2
VTU
Maximum ultimate torsional stress in any component rectangle including torsion

reinforcement, vtu
3.3.7
3.75 N/mm2
FYL
Characteristic strength of longitudinal

reinforcement, fy1
410 N/mm2
FYV
Characteristic strength of transverse, link

reinforcement, fyv
250 N/mm2
GMC
Safety factor for concrete, (Lambda)m
GMS
Safety factor of steel, (Lambda)m
PMAXFL
Max. tensile reinf. ratio for beams
3.11.5
PMINFL
Min. tensile reinf. ratio for beams
3.11.4.1
PMAXP
Max. compressive reinf. ratio for beams
3.11.5
0.04
PMAXCO
Max. reinf. ratio for columns
3.11.5
0.06
PMINCO
Min. reinf. ratio for columns
3.11.4.1
0.01
PMAXWV
Max. vertical reinf. ratio for walls
3.11.5
0.04
PMINWV
Min. vertical reinf. ratio for walls
3.11.4.1
0.004
PMINWH
Min. horiz. reinf. ratio for walls
3.11.4.2
0.0025
ES
Modulus of elasticity for reinforcing steel, Es

2.4.2.4
200 KN/mm2
2.4.2.4
26 KN/mm2
1.5
1.15
EC
Modulus of elasticity for concrete, Ec
EU
Ultimate concrete compressive strain
0.04
0.0015
0.0035
Note:
1.
The constant 'DENSITY' is the GTSTRUDL constant of the same name which has been
set to a value of 2380 kg/m3 for reinforced concrete.
3 - 16
CONSTANTS Command
TABLE 3.3.3-3. CONSTANTS and Assumed Values for BSI BS8110

CONSTANT
Explanation
CP110-72
Assumed Value
FCU
Characteristic strength of concrete, fcu
3.1.7.21
25 N/mm2
FY
Table 3.1
460 N/mm2
DC
Unit weight of plain concrete, Dc
2300 kg/m3
DENSITY
Unit weight of reinforced concrete (2)
2380 kg/m3
VU
Ult. shear stress in beam with links
VC
Max. ultimate concrete shear stress, vc
VTMIN
3.4.5.2
4.00 N/mm2
Table 3.9
0 .34 N/mm2
Max. ultimate concrete torsional stress in any

component rectangle, vtmin
Part 2, Table 2.3
0.33 N/mm2
Max. ultimate torsional stress in any component rectangle including torsion reinforcement, vtu
Part 2, Table 2.3
4.00 N/mm2
Characteristic strength of longitudinal reinforcement, fy1
Table 3.1
460 N/mm2
Characteristic strength of transverse, link

reinforcement, fyv
Table 3.1
250 N/mm2
GMC
Safety factor for concrete, (Lambda)m
Table 2.2
1.5
GMS
Safety factor of steel, (Lambda)m
Table 2.2
1.15
GMV
Safety factor of concrete in shear, (Lambda)m
Table 2.2
1.25
PMAXFL
Maximum tensile reinf. ratio for beams
3.12.6.1
0.04
PMINFL
Minimum tensile reinf. ratio for beams
Table 3.27
PMAXP
Maximum compressive reinf. ratio for beams
3.12.6.1
0.04
PMAXCO
Maximum reinforcement ratio for columns
3.12.6.2
0.06
PMINCO
Minimum reinforcement ratio for columns
Table 3.27
0.004
ES
Modulus of elasticity for reinforcing steel, Es
VTU
FYL
FYV
0.0013
2.5.4
200 KN/mm2
25 KN/mm2
EC
Modulus of elasticity for concrete, Ec
Part 2, Table 7.2
EU
Ultimate concrete compressive strain
Figure 2.1
0.0035
Notes:
1.
2.
All BS8110 references refer to Part 1, unless specifically noted as Part 2.

The constant 'DENSITY' is the GTSTRUDL constant of the same name which
has been set to a value of 2380 kg/m3 for reinforced concrete.
3 - 17
CONSTANTS Command
Regarding the specification of values for WC, FCP, and FCU, the user must be aware
of the following important conventions:
1.
Where WC is specified for ACI codes, the values for DENSITY, EC, E, and
RFSP, are automatically recomputed as follows: the DENSITY of reinforced
concrete is computed as WC plus an additional five pounds per cubic foot for
reinforcing steel; EC is computed according to the ACI code specified
relationship (Table 3.3.3-1); E, Young's Modulus for analysis, is set equal to EC;
and RFSP, if not directly specified by the user, is assigned a value according to
the following schedule:
Normal weight concrete, WC > 120 pcf:
RFSP
=
6.67 (ACI 318-63)
=
6.7 (ACI 318-77 through ACI 318-89)
Sand lightweight concrete, 110 pcf # WC # 120 pcf:
RFSP
=
.85 x (RFSP of normal weight concrete)
All lightweight concrete, 90 pcf # WC # 110 pcf:
RFSP
=
.75 x (RFSP for normal weight concrete)
Ultra lightweight concrete, WC # 90 pcf:
RFSP
=
.75 x (RFSP for normal weight concrete)
2.
When FCP is specified for ACI codes, the value for EC is automatically
recomputed (Table 3.3.3-1) and E is set equal to EC.
3.
When FCU is specified for BSI codes, new values for EC, VU, VTMIN, and
VTU are calculated. These constants are dependent on the value of FCU
and change automatically when FCU does. If the user wishes to specify a
value different from the value based on FCU, that particular constant must
be specified after FCU.
The formulae and code references used to calculate the values of EC, VU,
VTMIN, and VTU, along with a sample of the generated informational
message follow:
3 - 18

*
Constant
CONSTANTS Command
Formula
Reference
EC
20. + 0.2(FCU
VU
0.8
VTMIN
0.0067
VTU
0.8
# 5.0
# 0.4
# 5.0
Part 2, Section 7,
Equation 19
Part 1, Section 3.4.5.2
Part 2, Section 2.4.6,
Table 2.3
Part 2, Section 2.4.6,
Table 2.3
UNITS NEWTONS MM
CONSTANTS
FCU 35.
**** INFO_STBCN2 -- FCU HAS BEEN SPECIFIED. THE FOLLOWING CONSTANTS
ARE DEPENDENT ON FCU AND HAVE BEEN CHANGED TO
THESE VALUES (IN ACTIVE UNITS):
EC
= 27000.0
VU
= 4.7324
VTMIN = 0.3946
VTU
= 4.7324
The user is cautioned on the following three points:
1.
Values for EU should not be specified to be different from the assumed value of
.003 for ACI codes or .0035 for BSI code without a clear understanding of the
experimental derivation of this value and its influence on design and checking.
2.
Caution should be exercised when specifying a value for FY greater than 75 ksi
and a value for FYST greater than 60 ksi because of problems related to
concrete crushing failure, diagonal crack width control, and brittle failure of
reinforcement at sharp bend points.
3.
No distinction is made between reinforcement yield strength in tension and

compression.
3 - 19
CONSTANTS Command
Examples:
Suppose we have a frame with 40 members:
UNITS INCHES POUNDS
CONSTANTS FCP 3500.0 ALL BUT 5000.0 MEMBERS 10 TO 20, 26 30, 33 TO 35
WC .0694 ALL BUT .0839 MEMBERS 10 TO 20, 26 30, 33 TO 35
RFSP 4.0 ALL BUT 6.0 MEMBERS 10 TO 20, 26 30, 33 TO 35
In this example all member constants have the assumed values indicated in Table
3.3.2.1, with the exception that values for FCP, WC, and RFSP are directly specified
as follows: for members 10 to 20, 26, 30, and 33 to 35, FCP = 5000.0 psi, WC = 145.0
pcf, and RFSP = 4.0, while for the remainder of the members, FCP = 3500.0 psi, WC
= 120.0 psf, and RFSP = 6.0. As a result of the specified values for FCP and WC, a
value of 4,074,281 psi is computed for EC and E for members 10 through 20, 26, and
33 through 35, while a value of 2,566,373 psi is computed for EC and E for the
remaining members. The value of RFSP for all members is unaffected by the specified
value of WC because RFSP is specified directly.
Modifications:
The CONSTANTS command functions as described above regardless of whether the
ADDITIONS mode, or CHANGES mode, or DELETIONS mode is active (see Section
2.1.3.3, GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual).
3 - 20
3.3.4
MEMBER DIMENSIONS (PRISMATIC) Command
MEMBER DIMENSIONS (PRISMATIC) (shape, section values) (orientation)

list (shape, section values) (orientation)
C
C
C
C
list (shape, section values) (orientation)
command elements:
3 - 21
command elements:
list
v1, v2, ...., v7
list of member names
values for the cross-sectional dimension parameters

shown in Figure 3.3.4-1.
Explanation
The MEMBER DIMENSIONS (PRISMATIC) command is used to specify the crosssection shape and dimensions of prismatic members with any of the various crosssection types illustrated in Figure 3.3.4-1. The prismatic member cross-section
properties are computed automatically.
These computed member properties are based on gross cross-section properties and
do not reflect concrete steel reinforcing, cracking, creep, or shrinkage. The following
section value data is necessary:
C
C
C
C
C
RECTANGLE -- two dimensions, B and H, are required.

TEE -- dimension H is required. For a rectangular web, either B or BW must be
given as the web width. If both B and BW are given and if BT is not given, then
BT=(B-BW)/2 is assumed. Thus a symmetrical TEE section with a rectangular
web requires only four specified dimensions, B (or BW), H, T, and BF.
RL (Right L) -- a section is defined as an RL if the flange is on the right when
looking in the direction of the member's positive x axis, i.e., looking from start to
end. Similar to the TEE section, dimension H is required. If only B or BW is
given, B and BW are assumed equal.
LL (Left L) -- a section is defined as an LL if the flange is on the left when looking
in the direction of the member's positive x axis, i. e., looking from start to end.
CROSS -- at least four dimensions, B, H, B1, and H1 are required.
CIRCLE -- diameter, B, is required.
3 - 22
Figure 3.3.4-1Cross Section Shapes and Dimensions
3 - 23
Use of orientation information simplifies BETA angle designation. The orientation data
specifies the relationship between the local y axis of the member and the global
coordinate system axes. The orientation method may be used only if the member itself
is parallel to a global axis. As an example, the XNEG designation means that the local
y axis of the member is in the opposite direction to the global X axis. If neither the
orientation nor the BETA angle is given for a member, then BETA=0 is assumed.
Members which are structural walls may have a rectangular or barbell shaped crosssection. If rectangular, the RECTANGLE with B and H dimensions may be used to
specify properties. If barbell shaped, MEMBER DIMENSIONS cannot be used at this
time to specify exact member properties. But after a barbell wall is proportioned, the
geometric properties are calculated exactly and are updated automatically.
Example:
UNITS MILLIMETER
MEMBER DIMENSION
1 TO 6 TEE BF 2000. BW 300. H 600. T 100.
'COL1' TO 'COL4' RECT B 400. H 400.
'COL5' CIRCLE B 450
3 - 24
3.3.5
MEMBER DIMENSIONS VARIABLE Command
MEMBER DIMENSIONS VARIABLE (shape) (orientation)

list (shape) (orientation)
variable-specs
C
C
C
list (shape) (orientation)
variable-specs
command elements:
variable specs =
SEGMENT i1 ( AND i2 ), section values, LENGTH v1
i1, i2 =
=
v1
segment numbers.
actual lengths of the segments i1 and i2.
Explanation:
The MEMBER DIMENSIONS VARIABLE command is a more general form of the
MEMBER DIMENSIONS command. However, the shape, section values, and
orientation data are treated identically for both forms. For a given member, all
SEGMENTS must have the same orientation; however, the shape data and section
values data may be different for each SEGMENT. Each SEGMENT must be specified
and must be consecutively numbered from the start of the member beginning with 1.
If two SEGMENTS are identical, then the "AND i2" portion of the command may be
used.
3 - 25
Example:
UNITS FEET
MEMBER DIMENSIONS VARIABLE
1 RECTANGULAR
SEGMENTS
1 AND 9 B 2. H 10.
L 1.5
SEG
2 AND 8 B 2. H 4.67 L 4.
SEG
3 AND 7 B 2. H 4.
L 4.
SEG
4 AND 6 B 2. H 3.33 L 4.
SEG
5
B 2. H 3
L 5.
This example illustrates the MEMBER DIMENSIONS VARIABLE command to

represent the beam shown in Figure 3.3.5-1A.
Figure 3.3.5-1 Example of Dimensioning Variable Members
3 - 26
3.3.6
GIRDER Command
GIRDER Command
Tabular form of command:
.
.
.
Sequential form of command:
command elements:
ij
integer identifier of a girder
'aj'
one to eight alphanumeric character identifier of a girder
listj
list of member names which form the girder
3 - 27
GIRDER Command
Explanation:
For reinforced concrete design it is convenient to identify a structural element as a
girder. A girder is a collection of linear, contiguous members. In design a girder may
be considered a horizontal element spanning between two columns as shown in Figure
3.3.6-1. "Girders" may be used with the DESIGN DATA, PROPORTION, and DETAIL
commands.
Example:
GIRDER 'G1' MEMBER 1 TO 4 / 'G2' MEMBER 5 6
3 - 28
Figure 3.3.6-1
GIRDER Command
Plan and elevation of reinforced concrete frame illustrating GIRDERS made up

of a collection of MEMBERS between supports.
3 - 29
Orthogonal Buildings Modeling Commands
3.4

GTSTRUDL/RC extends conventional GTSTRUDL automatic generation capabilities
so that floor slabs, wall panels, and members may be easily described for orthogonal
structures with the "GRID DEFINITION" series of commands. These commands
enable the member dimensions plus the floor, wall, and member loads to be specified
at the same time that the geometry of the structure is being described.
The "GRID DEFINITION" series of commands include the GRID DEFINITION
command, the GRID MEMBER command, the FLOOR command, the WALL command,
the END OF DEFINITION command, and the FACE OF SUPPORT command.
3 - 30
3.4.1
GRID DEFINITION Command
command elements:
spacing-specs
i1 AT s1, ( i2 AT s2 .... )
i1, i2, . . .
number of grid plane spaces.
s1, s2, . . .
length of the grid plane spaces.
Explanation:
The members of an orthogonal building lie in planes, called grid planes, that are normal
to the global X, Y, and Z coordinate axes. The global Y axis is always the vertical axis,
positive in the direction opposite gravity. If used, the GRID DEFINITION command
must precede any other command that creates joints or members.
Example:
UNITS FEET
GRID DEFINITION Z 2 AT 20.0, 1 AT 22.0, 1 AT 20.0, Y 3 AT 11.5, X 2 AT 24.0
This example defines the grid shown in Figure 3.4.1-1. Grid planes X1, Y1, and Z1
each contain the origin of the global coordinate system.
3 - 31
Figure 3.4.1-1
Example of a GRID DEFINITION
3 - 32
3.4.2
GRID MEMBER Command
GRID MEMBER Command
GRID MEMBER line-specs (bound-specs) (dimension-specs) (load-specs)

(load-specs)
(load-specs)
C
C
C
command elements:
3 - 33
GRID MEMBER Command
i, j, k, m
integer identifiers for the grid planes which are defined by the line
space.
n1, n2,
n3, ...
integer identifiers for the grid planes which define the extent of the
members.
v1, v2,
v3, ...v7
values for the cross-section dimension parameters which are illustrated

in Figure 3.4.2-1.
w1
value for the unit weight of the grid member.
w2
value for the CONCENTRATED load.
w3
location of the CONCENTRATED load as either a fractional (FR) or

absolute distance from the start of the member.
w4
value for the UNIFORM load.
3 - 34
GRID MEMBER Command
w5, w6
starting (LA) and ending (LB) locations respectively of the uniform load
as either fractional (FR) or absolute distances from the start of the
member.
w7, w8
starting (WA) and ending (WB) values respectively for the

LINEAR load.
w9, w10
starting (LA -- associated with WA) and ending (LB -- associated

with WB) locations respectively of the LINEAR load as either
fractional (FR) or absolute distances from the member start.
Explanation:
After the reference grid has been defined by the GRID DEFINITION command, the
GRID MEMBER command is used to specify the existence and location of members.
The member cross-section shape, cross-section dimensions, and any loads acting on
the members may also be specified by this command.
Line-Specs
The line specs are used to define those grid lines which represent the members of the
structure. A grid line is defined as the intersection of two non-parallel grid planes. For
example. "X 4 Z 3" defines a member which coincides with the grid line formed by the
intersection of the X4 grid plane with the Z3 grid plane (see Figure 3.4.2-1). The line
spec "Z 4 5 X 3 5 TO 7 9 " defines a group of 10 members as shown in Figure 3.4.2-2.
Bound-Specs
If no bound specs are given, then the members, including any dimensions and
loadings, are assumed to be defined over the full extent of the designated grid lines.
Each pair of numbers in the bound specs identifies two grid planes which act as the
boundaries between which the members extend.
3 - 35
GRID MEMBER Command
Figure 3.4.2-1
Example of Grid Line Definition
3 - 36
Figure 3.4.2-2
GRID MEMBER Command
Example of Multiple Grid Line Definitions
3 - 37
GRID MEMBER Command
Dimension-Specs
The dim specs are optional and are used to specify cross- section shapes and crosssection dimensions for the members that were defined by the line and bound specs.
The components of the dim specs are identical to those in the MEMBER DIMENSIONS
command. For T-beams and L-beams in a beam-and-slab building, it is sufficient to
specify the width B and the overall depth H (including the slab) of the rectangular web,
provided that the modifier WEB is added after RECTANGLE in the dim specs.
Appropriate TEE, RL, or LL sections will then be generated internally. Vertical
members (parallel to the global Y axis) are always assumed to be columns, and
therefore are never converted into such sections.
Load-Specs
There are three types of loadings that can be specified by the load specs: (1) self
weight (SW), (2) dead load (DL), and (3) live load (LL). The SW load is treated as an
additional component of DL (SW+DL). Force and moment data are stored in the data
base under two automatically generated, independent loading conditions defined as
'*DL' and '*LL', where the '*DL' loading condition is used to store the SW and DL data
while the '*LL' loading condition is used to store the LL data.
Example:
UNITS KIPS FT
GRID MEMBER X 1 TO 3 Y 2 TO 4
DIMENSIONS RECT B 1.0 H 2.0 SW LL FORCE Y UNIFORM -.100
GRID MEMBER Z 1 TO 5 Y 2 TO 4 DIMENSION TEE B .67 H 2.0 BF 2.0 T .5 SW
LOAD COMBINATION 1 'ULTIMATE LOADING' COMBINE '*DL' 1.4 '*LL' 1.7
These grid member commands produce beams in the x and z directions on each
"story" of the grid shown in Figure 3.4.1-1.
3 - 38
3.4.3
FLOOR Command
FLOOR Command
FLOOR ( Y ) list
( bound specs ) ( dimensions specs ) ( distribution specs ) ( load specs )
command elements:
3 - 39
FLOOR Command
i, j,
i, j, k
integer identifiers for Y grid planes.
integer step counter for the Y grid plane identifiers.
n 1 , n2 ,
n 3 , n4
integer identifiers for the X and Z boundary grid planes.
v1
floor slab thickness.
v2
optional unit weight of floor slab.
v3
value for dead load (DL) in units of force per unit area.
v4
value for the live load (LL) in units of force per unit area.
Explanation:
The FLOOR command is used to specify location, geometry, and loading data which
are used for the generation of floor systems in orthogonal buildings where:
List:
The list is used to designate the existence of floors by specifying the integer identifiers
of the grid planes which represent the floors.
Bound specs:
The horizontal extent of a floor is specified by the bound specs.
Dimension specs
The dimension specs give the thickness v1 of the floor slabs. For joist floors this should
be an "equivalent" thickness so that the self weight (SW) is computed accurately. The
FLOOR command results in the generation of rectangular, two-dimensional finite
elements of the 'PSRR' type for each floor panel.
Note that if an element type other than a PSRR type is desired, the ELEMENT
PROPERTIES command can be specified in the CHANGES command mode following
the GRID DEFINITION command.
3 - 40
FLOOR Command
Distribution specs
The manner in which the floor loads are transferred to supporting beams is designated
by specifying either the ONE WAY option, followed by either the X or Z modifiers, the
FLAT SLAB option or the TWO WAY option. For two-way systems, the loadings are
distributed to each supporting beam in a triangular or trapezoidal fashion in Figure
3.4.3-1.
The Flat Slab option indicates that the floor loads are to be carried by slab-beam strips
which will be later analyzed using an equivalent frame technique. Because slab-beams
are automatically generated for flat slab floor systems, the GRID MEMBER command
(Section 3.3) should not be used to specify the existence of these beams, or any other
marginal beams on the edges of flat slab floor panels.
Load specs
There are three types of loading conditions that may be defined by the load specs: (1)
the self weight (SW) load as indicated above, (2) the dead load (DL), and (3) the live
load (LL). For each supporting beam, the SW and DL loadings are stored under the
'*DL' loading condition as a system of uniformly distributed forces in the global Y
direction. In a similar manner the LL loading is stored under the '*LL' loading condition.
3 - 41
FLOOR Command
Figure 3.4.3-1
Tributary area of load distributed to each edge beam for TWO WAY
distribution
Example
FLOOR Y 4 BOUND X 1 3 Z 1 5 T 0.5 ONE WAY X SW
This command creates the "roof" slab for the grid shown in Figure 3.4.1-1.
3 - 42
3.4.4
WALL Command
WALL Command
command elements:
dimension-specs
T v1
element-type-specs
ELEMENT (Type) 'a1'
load-specs
WL m1 w1 (m2 w2) ... (mi wi)
i, j, k
integer identifiers for X and Z grid planes.
integer step counter for the X and Z grid

plane identifiers.
n1, n2,
n3, n4
v1
integer identifiers for the X, Y, and Z grid

plane boundaries.
=
wall thickness.
3 - 43
WALL Command
'a1'
alphanumeric name of any rectangular, two-dimensional finite element

provided in the GTSTRUDL finite element library (Table 2.3.1,
GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual).
mi
integer wind load identifier.
wi
wind load pressure.
Explanation
The WALL command is used to specify location, geometry, and loading data which are
needed for the generation of rectangular cladding, nonstructural, and/or structural wall
systems in orthogonal buildings.
The wind load pressures are converted into equivalent joint loads by distributing the
total load on each wall element to its four corner nodes. The wind load numbers, mi,
are converted into GTSTRUDL loading identifiers by the addition of the prefix '*WL/'.
For example, the wind loadings identified by 2 and 10 in a WALL command become
GTSTRUDL loading identifiers '*WL/2' and '*WL/10' respectively.
Example
UNIT FEET POUND
WALL Z 1 BOUND Y 1 2 X 1 3 T 0.0 WL 1 10.
This creates a non-structural wall on plane Z1 from the base (first story) to the second
story. The wall has no thickness (glass) but resists a wind force of 10 pound/ft2
perpendicular to it given as load '*WL/1'.
3 - 44
3.4.5
END OF DEFINITION Command
END OF DEFINITION
Explanation
The data specified by the GRID DEFINITION, GRID MEMBER, FLOOR, and WALL
commands are converted and stored in the data base with the END OF DEFINITION
command. This command results in the automatic generation and numbering of joints,
members (beams and columns), and finite elements for floor and wall panels. The
'*DL', '*LL' , '*TORDL', '*TORLL', and ' *WL/' loading conditions are defined.
Example:
UNITS FEET
GRID DEFINITION X 2 AT 10.0, Z 2 AT 10.0 Y 2 AT 10.0
GRID MEMBER Y 2 X 1 TO 3
$ MEMBERS 6, 7, 14, 15, 22, 23
GRID MEMBER Y 3 X 1 TO 3 BOUNDS 1 2 $ MEMBERS 8, 16, 24
GRID MEMBER Y 2 Z 1 TO 3
$ MEMBERS 25,26 29, 30, 33, 34
GRID MEMBER Y 3 Z 1 2
$ MEMBERS 27, 28, 31, 32
GRID MEMBER X 1 TO 3 Z 1 2
$ MEMBERS 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11
$
12,18, 19, 20
GRID MEMBER X 1 TO 3 Z 3 BOUND 1 2
$ MEMBERS 5, 13, 21
WALL Z 3 BOUNDS Y 1 2 X 1 3
$ ELEMENTS 35, 36
WALL X 3 BOUNDS Y 1 3 Z 1 2
FLOOR Y 2 BOUNDS Y 1 3 Z 1 3
FLOOR Y 3 BOUNDS X 1 3 Z 1 2
END OF DEFINITION
$ ELEMENTS 37, 38
$ ELEMENTS 39, 40, 41, 42
$ ELEMENTS 43, 44
The structure defined by the above commands, and the manner in which the joints,
members, and floor and wall elements are numbered, are illustrated in Figure 3.4.5-1.
3 - 45
Figure 3.4.5-1 Example of Joint and Member Numbering
3 - 46
Additional Input with Conventional GTSTRUDL

Commands
After specifying the END OF DEFINITION command, it is then possible to use any
conventional GTSTRUDL command for specifying data which would be applicable to
the generated structure. Parts of the structure may be modified or deleted. New
members and joints may be added, member properties or dimensions may be added,
new loadings may be described, etc.
3 - 47
FACE OF SUPPORT Command
3.4.6
FACE (OF SUPPORT) (ALL)

( list ) ( start-specs ) ( end-specs )
C
C
C
( list ) ( start-specs ) ( end-specs )
command elements:
list
list of member names.
start-specs =
START ( v1 ) ( UNSUPPORTED ).
end specs =
END (v2) ( UNSUPPORTED ).
v1
the positive real value which represents the distance from

the theoretical joint to the FACE OF SUPPORT, at the
START of the member.
v2
similar to v1 except that v2 applies to the END of the

member. v2 is likewise positive.
Explanation:
The FACE OF SUPPORT command is provided in order to permit the user to define
the clear-span length of one-way solid and joist floor slabs. The clear-span length of
a one-way floor panel is computed as follows:
3 - 48
Lc
L - ( v1 + v2 )
where:
Lc
clear-span length
joint-to-joint length
The modifier UNSUPPORTED is used in place of v1 or v2 when the members in the list
are cantilevered.
3 - 49
Proportioning Reinforced Concrete Members
3.5
Proportioning Reinforced Concrete Members
Introduction
GTSTRUDL/RC incorporates a variety of capabilities which proportion cross section
dimensions and detail longitudinal and transverse reinforcement for beams, columns,
one-way solid slabs, one-way joist or ribbed slabs, two way flat plates and flat slabs,
monolithic beam-column joints, and structural walls.
The GTSTRUDL/RC design capabilities incorporate procedures which are based on
the USD method or limit state method according to the assumptions given in the active
code. Included is the use of an equivalent rectangular stress block to represent the
ultimate compressive stress in the concrete for ACI codes and a parabolic stress block
for the BSI code.
The DESIGN DATA command is used to specify values for basic design parameters
such as member type, desired bar size, and amount of concrete cover. The execution
of the beam, column, flat plate, flat slab, and structural wall proportioning/detailing
procedures is requested by the PROPORTION command.
For two-way slab design, the SEGMENT, SLAB SUPPORTS, and JOINT DETAILS
commands must be given prior to proportioning the floor members. For slender
columns, the series of PDELTA commands presented in Chapter 3.9 should be given
prior to proportioning the columns.
3 - 50
3.5.1
DESIGN DATA Command
DESIGN DATA Command
member type specs

(primary bar specs)
(secondary bar specs)
(depth specs)
(shear specs)
(cover specs)
(crack control)
(design procedure specs)
where the various specifications ("specs") are shown in Tables 3.5.1-1 through
3.5.1-8. Input data follows the header in tabular form.
command element:
list
list of members, girders or joints to which the DESIGN DATA applies.
3 - 51
DESIGN DATA Command
Table 3.5.1-1
DESIGN DATA for Beams
Member type specs
Primary bar specs
Secondary bar specs
Cover specs
Design Procedure
specs
Not Applicable
3 - 52
DESIGN DATA Command
Table 3.5.1-2
DESIGN DATA for Columns
Member type
specs
Primary bar
specs
Secondary bar
specs
=
Cover specs
Design Procedure
specs
=
Not Applicable
3 - 53
DESIGN DATA Command
Table 3.5.1-3
DESIGN DATA for Flat Plates and Flat Slabs
Member type
specs
Primary bar specs
Secondary bar specs
Cover specs
Not Applicable
3 - 54
DESIGN DATA Command
Table 3.5.1-4
DESIGN DATA for Flat Plates and Flat Slabs
Member type specs
Primary bar specs
Cover specs
3 - 55
DESIGN DATA Command
Table 3.5.1-5
DESIGN DATA for Joists ( One-Way Ribbed Slabs )
Member type specs
Cover specs
3 - 56
DESIGN DATA Command
The data elements in Tables 3.5.1-1 through 3.5.1-5 are described as follows:
i1, i2,
i3, i4 =
in
j1, j2,
=
j3
integers which denote the standard sizes of the primary reinforcing

bars. With the BUNDLE modifier, these integers denote the standard
sizes of the reinforcing bars which make up the two-bar bundles (see
Table 2.3-1 to 2.3-3).
integer which denotes the standard bar size for the stirrup reinforcing
in the case of beams, and tie or spiral reinforcing in the case of
columns.
integers which denote standard bar sizes for hoops used as transverse
reinforcement for columns designed for seismic or moderate seismic
conditions.
jy
maximum number of hoop legs parallel to local y axis.
vb,s
minimum spacing between the primary flexure reinforcing bars in

beams, flat plates, flat slabs, and one-way solid slabs.
vc
concrete cover dimension as illustrated in Figure 3.5.1-1.
vc,s
minimum spacing between the primary reinforcing bars in columns.
vcr
maximum value for the primary flexural reinforcement distribution

parameter Z (units are force per unit length).
vds
denominator of the depth-to-span ratio for deflection control in beam

proportioning.
vf
maximum permissible flange width for TEE and ELL beams.
3 - 57
DESIGN DATA Command
vh
center-to-center spacing between hoops in monolithic beam-column

joint.
vp
floor panel width for flat plates, flat slabs, one-way solid slabs, and oneway joists.
vpw
width of standard pan form for one-way joists.
vr
strength reduction factor (< 1.0) for the consideration of long column
effects in column design.
vs
spiral reinforcement diameter.
vs1, vs2, vs3

=
design spacings for the placement of stirrups. These values are
rounded down to the nearest whole number when stored in the
GTSTRUDL/RC data base.
vsh
maximum ultimate shear stress for beams.
vsL
slab thickness for one-way joists.
vst
stem width for the ribs of one-way joists.
vt
flange thickness for TEE and ELL beams.
vy
integer number of hoop legs reinforcement parallel to the local y axis

of a column or beam-column joint.
vz
integer number of hoop legs reinforcement parallel to the local z axis

of a column or beam-column joint.
3 - 58
DESIGN DATA Command
Typical Beam Cross-Section
Figure 3.5.1-1 Illustration of COVER Dimension
3 - 59
DESIGN DATA Command
Table 3.5.1-6
DESIGN DATA for Structural Walls
Member type specs =
Primary bar specs
Secondary bar specs
Cover specs
3 - 60
Design Procedure specs
DESIGN DATA Command
where,
vez
factor multiplied by width of wall B to give eccentricity for

out-of-plane bending,
vwbe
width of barbell boundary element,
vdbe
depth of barbell boundary element,
i1
boundary element bar size,
i2
bar size for uniform distribution in web of wall cross-section,
i3
bar size for horizontal shear reinforcing,
i4
bar size boundary element hoops,
3 - 61
DESIGN DATA Command
vsw
maximum allowable shear stress carried by wall cross-section,
vc
concrete cover for all wall reinforcing,
vtol
capacity analysis convergence tolerance (vtol = 0.01 by default),
vf
cross-section dimension of square grid fiber for the fiber capacity

analysis model (vf = 1.0 inch by default),
ncap
maximum number of capacity analysis iterations (ncap = 100 by default),
3 - 62
DESIGN DATA Command
Table 3.5.1-7
DESIGN DATA for Monolithic Beam-Column Joints
Member type spec
Secondary bar
spec
=
where,
j1, j2, j3
hoop bar size,
jn
hoop or spiral bar size,
jy
maximum number of hoop legs in local y direction,
iz
maximum number of hoop legs in local z direction,
vs
diameter of spiral reinforcement,
vh
minimum center-to-center spacing between hoops or minimum

pitch of spiral,
3 - 63
DESIGN DATA Command
Table 3.5.1-8
DESIGN DATA for Two-Way Solid Slabs
Member type specs =
Primary bar specs =
Cover specs
where,
i1, i2,
i3, i4 =
integers which denote the standard sizes of the primary reinforcing bar
sizes (see Tables 3.3.2-1 to 3.3.2-4),
vb,s
minimum spacing between the primary flexure reinforcing bars,
v1
cover spacing for bars running parallel to the global X axis,
v2
cover spacing for bars running parallel to the global Y axis,
3 - 64
DESIGN DATA Command
Explanation
The DESIGN DATA command is a preparatory command for the PROPORTION
command and the DETAIL command. The DESIGN DATA command is used to
specify data which fall into the following five categories: the member type (beam,
column, flat plate, flat slab, one-way solid slab, one-way joist slab, wall, joint, or twoway slab); the primary (longitudinal) and secondary (transverse) reinforcing type and
the design bar sizes; and a cover control parameter and the design procedure. If
GIRDERS is specified, then the given design data are used for each of the members
which comprise the girders.
For STRUCTURAL WALLS either a RECTANGULAR or BARBELL shaped wall may
be specified as illustrated in Figure 3.5.1-2. For either type, out-of-plane bending
(bending about the local y axis) may be specified with eccentricity factor EZF. The
value of EZF is multiplied by the width of the wall (or the web width for barbell), B, to
give an eccentricity in the local z direction. This eccentricity is multiplied by the axial
force to give the moment about the local y axis. If EZF is specified as zero, then only
in-plane bending is considered. If EZF is not specified, then the MY found from the
stiffness analysis is used for the out-of-plane bending force.
Member type specs
When BEAM member types are designated as having TEE or ELL cross-sections, the
flange thickness, T (vt), and the maximum permissible flange width, BFMAX (Vf), must
also be specified. During the design process for T-beams and L-beams, the dimension
for the flange width is proportioned as the smallest effective flange width from the value
for BFMAX, and the results of satisfying the span width and slab thickness provisions
of the active code.
COLUMN cross-section shapes can be specified as
RECTANGULAR, SQUARE, or CIRCULAR. Column slenderness effects are
considered by using the PDELTA analysis method which is described in Chapters 3.9
and 3.10. The FLAT PLATE members specified in the design data member list must
be the slab-beams generated from the FLOOR command data. The FLAT SLAB
member type is identical to the FLAT PLATE type except that drop panels are
considered in the design process. The ONE WAY SLAB type is designed as one-way
solid slabs. The JOIST type is designed as one-way ribbed slabs. The STRUCTURAL
WALL, often referred to as a shear wall, is assumed to have a vertical axis so that the
primary, compression flexural reinforcement is vertical and the shear-diagonal tension
reinforcement is horizontal. The TWO-WAY SLAB type designates those members
which are to be designed as solid slabs, supported on each edge by a beam.
Primary bar specs
For BEAM, FLAT PLATE, FLAT SLAB, ONE-WAY SLAB, and TWO-WAY SLAB
member types, two bar sizes (i1, i2) may be selected for TOP bars, and two bar sizes
(i3, i4) may be selected for BOTTOM bars. The design process calculates the required
3 - 65
DESIGN DATA Command
area of reinforcement, and then selects the number of bars needed to satisfy the
required area. For COLUMN member up to three primary reinforcing bar sizes, may
be specified. During the COLUMN design process, a design is generated for each
specified bar size, and the chosen bar size is the one which results in the smallest steel
area.
For STRUCTURAL WALLS one size of primary vertical bars may be specified for the
boundary element and one size may be specified for the web.
Secondary bar specs
The secondary bar specs are used to specify the bar sizes and other related data for
STIRRUP, TIE, and SPIRAL secondary reinforcing. If design spacings are not
specified, then S1 is taken as the smallest required spacing, S2 is taken as twice S1,
and S3 is taken as four times S1. The distance between the face of support and the
first stirrup is taken as one-half the S1 spacing dimension. All stirrup spacings are
rounded down to the nearest inch, or nearest centimeter if metric units are active.
Design of STIRRUP spacings assumes that the STIRRUPS are of the two-leg Ushaped type unless SEISMIC or torsion forces require a closed type.
For COLUMN member types, if SEISMIC or MODERATE SEISMIC has been specified,
secondary reinforcement in columns may be multiple leg HOOPS.
For STRUCTURAL WALLS, HORIZONTAL reinforcement is regarded as secondary
reinforcement.
For BEAM-COLUMN JOINTS, the only reinforcement used is secondary reinforcement
in the form of multiple leg HOOPS or circular SPIRAL. The local coordinate system of
a joint is identical to that of the column below the joint. If NY and NZ are not given, they
are assumed to equal the number of bars on the "A" face and on the "B" face of the
column below the joint, respectively.
Cover specs
If a value for the COVER is not specified or STANDARD is specified, then a COVER
of 1.5 inches is assumed for BEAM, COLUMN, and WALL member types, while .75
inches is assumed for FLAT PLATE, FLAT SLAB, ONE WAY SLAB, TWO WAY SLAB
and JOIST member types.
Design Procedure Specs
Design procedure specs are applicable to the STRUCTURAL WALL member type,
only. The capacity of walls is determined by either of two methods. With a FIBER
model the cross-section is divided into approximately square fibers with side
dimensions given by the FIBER SIZE. In the strip model, the compression zone
generally is divided into forty strips. Strain compatibility analysis determines the
3 - 66
DESIGN DATA Command
position of the neutral axis and the ultimate section capacity. For either model, one of
four concrete stress-strain relations may be chosen with CONCRETE STRESSSTRAIN.
Example
UNITS INCH
DESIGN DATA FOR MEMBER 6 7 8
TYPE BEAM ELL BFMAX 60. T 6.
BARS BEAM TOP 7 8 BOTTOM 6 7
STIRRUPS 3
COVER 1.5
This command provides data for beams 6, 7 and 8 shown in Figure 3.4.5-1 (Pg. 3-49).
Top bars will be selected as #7 or #8, bottom bars as #6 or #7, and stirrups as #3; with
a 1.5 inch cover between the stirrup and the outside of the beam.
3 - 67
DESIGN DATA Command
Barbell With Boundary Elements
Rectangular With Boundary Elements
Rectangular
Figure 3.5.1-2
Cross-sections of wall shapes and reinforcement arrangements which may be

designed with GTSTRUDL
3 - 68
3.5.2
SLAB SUPPORTS Command for Two-Way Slabs
SLAB SUPPORTS (ALL)

(list START v1 (support-specs) (END) v2 (support-specs)
.
.
(list START v1 (support-specs) (END) v2 (support-specs)
command elements:
list
list of slab-beam members to which the following SLAB SUPPORTS

data applies.
v1
distance from the joint center to the effective edge of the column capital
or the column face, in the direction of the span, and at the start of the
slab-beam member or members named in the list.
v2
distance from the joint center to the effective edge of the column capital
or the column face, in the direction of the span, and at the end of the
slab-beam member or members named in the list.
v3
effective width of the column capital, or total width of the column,

measured transversely to the direction of the span of the slab-beam
member or members named in the list.
v1 and v2 represent absolute distances.
3 - 69
Explanation
The SLAB SUPPORT command is used to describe the slab-to-column conditions for
slab-beam members which are to be designed as flat plates or flat slabs. The data
specified in this command are required in order to determine the critical sections for
beam shear, punching shear, moment transfer shear, and negative bending moment
during the flat plate and flat slab design process. The SLAB SUPPORTS command
provides for the description of three different types of slab-to-column support conditions
(INTERIOR, EXTERIOR CASE 1, and EXTERIOR CASE 2) as illustrated in Figure
3.5.2-1.
Example
UNITS INCH
DESIGN DATA MEM 30
TYPE FLAT SLAB PW 240.
BARS BEAM TOP 5 BOTTOM 4
COVER 0.75
SLAB SUPPORT
30 START 10. SQUARE INT END 10. SQUARE EXT CASE 2
If member 30 in Figure 3.4.5-1 represents an equivalent slab-beam member supported
by 20 inch square columns, the slab support command illustrates the support
conditions at joints 13 and 21.
3 - 70
Figure 3.5.2-1 Plan View of SLAB SUPPORT Dimensions
3 - 71
JOINT DETAILS Command for Two-Way Slabs
3.5.3
JOINT DETAILS
list DROP (PANEL) X v1 Z v2 (EX v3) (EZ v 4) (D v5)
command elements:
list
list of joints to which JOINT DETAILS data applies.
v1
the length of the drop panel edge which is parallel to the global X axis.
v2
the length of the drop panel edge which is parallel to the global Z axis.
v3
the eccentricity of the drop panel centroid from the joint center as
measured parallel to the global X axis.
v4
the eccentricity of the drop panel centroid from the joint center as
measured parallel to the global Z axis.
v5
depth or thickness of the drop panel.
Explanation
The JOINT DETAILS command describes the size and location of the drop panels for
the design of flat slabs. Figure 3.5.3-1 shows the plan and cross-section views of a
typical drop panel at a column support.
3 - 72
Figure 3.5.3-1 Drop Panel Dimensions
3 - 73
MEMBER SIMILARITIES Command
3.5.4
MEMBER (list) SIMILARITIES (ALL)

.
.
similarity specs
.
.
command elements:
3 - 74
3 - 75
list, list1 (i = 1, 7)
i1, i2, i3, i4, i5

'a1', 'a2', 'a3', 'a4', 'a5'
member lists.
=
positive integer member identifiers.
alphanumeric member identifiers.
Explanation
The MEMBER SIMILARITIES command permits the user to define relationships such
as cross-section dimensions and reinforcing steel of one set of members to the same
characteristics of another set of members.
Example
MEMBER SIMILARITIES
MAKE H MEMBER 6 EQUAL H MEMBER 7
SIZE OF BARS END MEM 6 EQUAL START MEMBER 7
This command assures that when members 6 and 7 in Figure 3.4.5-1 are
PROPORTIONED, that 6 and 7 will have the same depth and that the negative moment
bars at the end of member 6 will be continuous with the negative moment bars at the
start of member 7, and be the same size.
3 - 76
3.5.5
SEGMENT Command for Two-Way Slabs
command elements:
tolerance specs =
TOLERANCE (FRACTIONAL) v
number of slab-beams included in

the segment.
maximum allowable unbalanced

moment at any joint in the segment.
Explanation
When designing the flat plates, flat slabs, and columns of a two-way slab and column
structure, the segmenting process must be executed in order to calculate design
forces. The SEGMENT command must be issued prior to the PROPORTION
MEMBER command in order to specify that segmenting shall be included in the flat
plate, flat slab, and column design procedures.
3 - 77
The SEGMENT BY FLOOR is used if the horizontal extent of the segment is to be

determined automatically, but the vertical extent of the segment is confined to the floor
of the slab member under design, plus the adjacent columns as commonly assumed
for an equivalent frame analysis. The far ends of the columns are assumed fixed,
except at supported joints which have been appropriately "moment released". Moment
distribution analysis is used to calculate the end moments due to dead and live loads
in all members of the segment. These moments are then used as a basis for the
determination of the critical moment and shear envelopes for design.
If the PATTERN option is given, envelopes of maximum algebraic moment, minimum
algebraic moment, and maximum absolute shear are created. On the other hand, if the
PATTERN option is omitted, then a total live load envelope and the maximum absolute
shear envelope are created.
3 - 78
3.5.6
PROPORTION MEMBER Command
Elements:
list
list of members or girders.
B (vb)
the width of rectangular beams and columns, or the stem width

of T-beams and L-beams, or the diameter of circular columns,
or the web width of a structural wall as B is measured parallel to
the local z axis.
3 - 79
H (vh)
the overall cross-section depth of rectangular beams, Tbeams, L-beams, flat plates, flat slabs, and columns, as
illustrated in Figure 3.3.4-1 (H is measured parallel to the
local y axis).
LW (vlw)
the overall cross-section length of a structural wall (LW is

measured parallel to the local y axis).
P (vp)
the reinforcement ratio.
v6, v7, v8, v9
the relative number of reinforcing bars on each face of a

tied, rectangular, or square column.
Explanation
The PROPORTION MEMBER command is used to request the actual design of
members and girders.
The STEEL DISTRIBUTION option is illustrated in Figure 3.8.2-1. The WITH DETAIL
option causes exact reinforcing bar cutoffs to be determined, and details shear and
torsion reinforcement.
Example
UNITS CENTIMETER
PROPORTION MEMBER 6 7 GIVEN B 20. H 40. WITH DETAIL
This command will proportion all longitudinal and transverse reinforcement for
members 6 and 7. The width of the web will be 20 cm., and the depth will be 40 cm.
The "With Detail" specifies that bar cut-off and stirrups are detailed.
3 - 80
3.5.7
DETAIL Command
DETAIL Command
cutoff specs =
3 - 81
DETAIL Command
command elements:
list
list of members, girders, or beam-column joints.
listn
list of members which form a beam continuous over

supports. The first and last members in the list are
assumed to be end spans while others are assumed to be
interior spans. The sequence of members in the list must
correspond to their actual location sequence in the
structure.
Each list of continuous members is separated by a " / "
(slash).
v1,v2,v3
stirrup spacings. These values are rounded down to the

nearest whole number.
i1
number of top bars spliced continuous throughout the

member (must be an even number).
v4
a percent of top bars spliced continuous throughout the

member.
3 - 82
v5,v6,v7,v8
DETAIL Command
for top bars, the ratio of the distance from the START or END of
the member to the cutoff point, to the total member length (given
as a percent as shown in Figures 3.5.7-1 and 3.5.7-2).
i2
number of bottom bars continuous throughout the member

(must be an even number).
v9
percentage of total bottom bars throughout the member.
v10,v11,v12,v13
for bottom bars, the ratio of the distance from the START or
END of the member to the cutoff point, to the total member
length (given as a percent).
vh
center-to-center spacing between hoops in beam-column

joint.
Explanation
The DETAIL command is used for beams to determine cutoff points and bar lengths for
flexural reinforcement, to design spacing requirements for stirrups based on shear or
combined shear and torsion, and to calculate an area of longitudinal reinforcement
required for torsion. DETAIL is used to design beam-column joint reinforcement for
joints specified in the JOINTS list.
The STANDARD CUTOFF option gives the user control over where flexural
reinforcement should be cut off, otherwise the code-based exact cutoff points are
calculated. The CONTINUOUS MEMBERS list option permits the user to detail
reinforced concrete members in a manner more closely resembling common practice.
Beam members which lie in a special sequence may be recognized as continuous by
specifying those members in a CONTINUOUS MEMBERS list. Several continuous
sequences may be specified. Each sequence is listed; each list is separated by a slash
(/).
If the MEMBER ECCENTRICITIES command has been used to specify the size of the
beam-column joint, the length of top bars is the distance from the face of support to the
cutoff point plus the member eccentricity. For continuous bottom bars, the length of
each bar is the member clear span length plus the start and end eccentricity distance.
The stirrup spacing design automatically considers combined shear and torsion forces
if the applied torsion is greater than that specified in ACI 318. The total required area
of longitudinal reinforcement for torsion (Al) is computed at critical sections along the
length of the member; yet individual longitudinal torsion reinforcement is not detailed.
3 - 83
DETAIL Command
Where SEISMIC design has been specified, a special analysis feature is enacted which
determines the "moments corresponding to probable strength" at the start and end of
the member. With those applied plastic moments the member is loaded with the active
SEISMIC GRAVITY loadings (Chapter 3.10) to generate a seismic shear envelope.
Example
DETAIL FOR CONTINUOUS MEM 33 34 / 27 28 / STANDARD
This command provides for the cutoff of longitudinal bars as illustrated in Figure 3.5.72.
3 - 84
DETAIL Command
Figure 3.5.7-1 Standard Cutoff for Interior and Exterior Members
3 - 85
DETAIL Command
Figure 3.5.7-2 Cutoff points for CONTINUOUS MEMBERS, STANDARD CUTOFF
3 - 86
3.5.8
ANALYZE and DESIGN Command for One-Way Slabs
ANALYZE and DESIGN Command for One-Way

Slabs
command elements:
lista, listb, . . .
list of members of floor elements which form a continuous

floor slab at a single floor level. The lists must be separated
by a free-standing slash (/) which must also appear at the
end of the series of lists.
H (vH)
the value at which the overall depth of the slab or joist

cross-section is fixed for the slab/joist analysis and
proportioning process.
Explanation
If members have been designated as ONE WAY SLAB types or JOIST types in a
DESIGN DATA command, then the ANALYZE AND DESIGN command must be used
to perform the analysis and design of these members.
The ANALYZE AND DESIGN command permits the user to request a moment and
shear coefficient analysis of a ONE WAY SLAB or JOIST, followed by a design
procedure which includes the proportioning of the overall slab depth, and the selection
and placement of primary reinforcements as shown in Figures 3.5.8-1 and 3.5.8-2.
The ONE WAY SLAB or JOIST analysis is based on the provisions of Section 8.3.3 of
3 - 87
ACI 318-83, whereby the shear forces and bending moments are computed at the ends
and midpoint of each floor span by simple coefficients which are functions of the
uniformly distributed ultimate load and the clear-span length of the floor.
3 - 88
Figure 3.5.8-1 ONE-WAY SOLID SLAB.
3 - 89
TYPICAL SECTION
NOTES:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
(TE)
(ET)
(TR)
(BOT)
(TEMP)
TOP END SPAN BAR

END SPAN TRUSS BAR
TRUSS BAR
BOTTOM BAR
TEMPERATURE BAR
Figure 3.5.8-2 ONE-WAY Joist Floor.
3 - 90
3.6
PRINT REINFORCEMENT Command
PRINT REINFORCEMENT Command
where,
list
list of members.
Explanation
This command is used to print the most detailed information concerning the
reinforcement which was selected and detailed by the execution of the PROPORTION
and DETAIL commands (Chapters 3.5.6 and 3.5.7 respectively).
3 - 91
QUANTITY TAKEOFF Command
3.7
QUANTITY TAKEOFF Command
command element,
list
n1, n2, n3
list of member names
integer identifiers for grid planes.
Explanation
The QUANTITY TAKEOFF command is used to compute the volume of concrete, the
length and weight of reinforcing bars, and the area of form-work for the structure. Both
proportioning and detailing must be complete for all designated members.
3 - 92
3.8
Beam Output
Interpretation of Reinforced Concrete Output

In the following Chapters, examples are given of a summary output for a typical beam
and a typical column.
3.8.1
Beam Output
An example of the summary output from the design of a three-span continuous T-beam
is presented in Figure 3.8-1. The three 20 foot continuous spans were designed for a
dead load of 750 lb/ft and live load of 1000 lb/ft, using the factored design load equal
to 1.4 x (dead load) + 1.7 x (live load).
TYPE -the beam cross-section shape as specified by the DESIGN DATA member type
specs (Chapter 3.5.1) is listed in this Chapter. In this case, the cross-section
shape is listed as TEE.
CONTR BY -the design of a beam can be controlled by FLEXURE or SHEAR. For example,
the design of member 2 is controlled by FLEXURE.
DIMENSIONS -the cross-section dimensions of the beam are listed according to the crosssection shape. If the cross-section of the beam is a RECTANGULAR shape,
then only the stem width and the height (overall depth) are listed. If the crosssection of the beam is a TEE or ELL shape, then four dimensions are printed:
the stem width, the height (overall depth), the flange width, and flange thickness.
Figure 3.8-2 shows the cross-section dimensions for member 2.
REINFORCEMENT DATA:
SECT DIST -the distance from the start of the member to the location of the critical design
sections is given as the section distance. For member 2, there are three critical
sections. Section 1 is located at the start of the member (0.0 ft.), section 2 is
20.0 ft. from the start of the member (corresponds to the end of the member),
and section 3 is 10 ft. from the start of the member.
3 - 93
Beam Output
Figure 3.8-1
Summary output from the PROPORTION WITH DETAIL command for a

continuous T-beam, members 1, 2, and 3.
3 - 94
Figure 3.8-1 (cont'd)
Beam Output

3 - 95
Beam Output
Figure 3.8-1 (cont'd)

3 - 96
Beam Output
TOP BARS and BOTTOM BARS -this part of the output summarizes the reinforcement data at each critical section.
The selected bar size (SIZE), the number of bars (NO), the number of layers
(LAYERS), and the total area of the bars (AREA) are listed. The distance from
the top (YD) or bottom (YU) of the cross-section to the centroid of the reinforcing
steel is also listed. In general, TOP BARS designates the reinforcement for
negative moment sections, while BOTTOM BARS designates the reinforcement
for positive moment sections. Figure 3.8-2 shows the reinforcement for member
2.
DESIGN MOMENT AT SECTION -the critical design moment is also listed for each critical section, along with the
required flexural steel area which corresponds to each design moment.
STIRRUP DESIGN -design of stirrup spacings is performed only if WITH DETAIL (see Chapter 3.5.6)
is given. Figure 3.8-3 illustrates the stirrup spacing design output for member 2.
The summary output includes the stirrup size and the stirrup spacings from the
start of the member and the end of the member. The first stirrup of the first group
at the start or end of the member is placed at a distance of s/2 from the face of
support, where s is the stirrup spacing within the first group.
The shear force at a "d" distance from the face of support is listed. Summary
output from the PROPORTION command also gives longitudinal auxiliary and
torsion reinforcement. Auxiliary reinforcement is that longitudinal steel satisfying
provisions of Section 10.6.7 of ACI 318. Longitudinal torsion reinforcement is
designed to satisfy Section 11.6.9.3 of ACI 318.
3 - 97
Beam Output
Figure 3.8-2Steel Arrangement in Member 2 of Continuous T-Beam.
3 - 98
Beam Output
Figure 3.8-3 Summary output for STIRRUPS, member 2.
3 - 99
Column Output
3.8.2
Column Output
The three story, seven bay plane frame shown in Figure 3.8-1 was designed by
GTSTRUDL/RC for a combination dead, live, and wind load. Figure 3.8.2-1 shows the
summary output which resulted from the execution of the PROPORTION command for
column member 16. These three rectangular tied columns were proportioned with #8,
#9, and #10 bars, and with #3 ties.
MEMBER
--
the member identifier is listed in this Chapter.
CRIT LD
--
the critical load which governed the design of the column for each
specified bar size is listed in this Chapter.
3 - 100
Column Output
Figure 3.8.2-1 Column steel arrangement for member 16
3 - 101
3.9

Column slenderness provisions may be satisfied by the GTSTRUDL/RC user "exactly"
by using a PDELTA, nonlinear analysis. The effects of cracking and reinforcement
yielding on the bending stiffness of beams is taken into account by specifying a
reduction factor for the beams' moments of inertia. A reduction factor of 50 percent is
suggested in the ACI 318 code commentary. The effects of cracking, reinforcement
yielding, and load duration on column bending stiffness are taken into account
automatically by a computation of the column bending rigidity, EI, according to:
where:
EI
the elements modulus of concrete
Ig
the moment of inertia of the gross column cross-section
Bd
the ratio of the maximum factored column dead load to the sum of the
maximum factored dead and live load
Four commands are used to perform a PDELTA analysis: (1) the SLENDERNESS
command which is used to specify the members for which slenderness effects
(nonlinear effects described above) are to be considered in the PDELTA analysis; (2)
the PDELTA LOADING command which is used to describe the loading condition for
which the PDELTA analysis is performed; (3) the PDELTA ANALYSIS command which
is used to request the PDELTA analysis; and (4) the CONVERGENCE TOLERANCE
command which is used to specify a convergence tolerance on the PDELTA analysis
equilibrium iterations.
3 - 102
3.9.1
SLENDERNESS Command
SLENDERNESS Command
command elements:
list1
list of members which are to be considered as columns.
list2
list of members which are to be considered as beams.
i1, i2
integer loading condition identifiers
'a1', 'a2'
alphanumeric loading condition identifiers
v1
a multiplication factor for the member forces of loading condition

i1 or 'a1'.
v2
a multiplication factor for the member forces of loading condition

i2 or 'a2'.
v3
the user-specified value for Bd in the equation given in Chapter

3.9.
v4
a percentage reduction factor for the moments of inertia of the

specified beam members.
3 - 103
SLENDERNESS Command
Explanation
The members which are designated as COLUMNS in list1 will typically be those
members which will display significant nonlinear behavior as a result of the PDELTA
effect and/or the influence of axial force on bending stiffness. The optional DEAD
LOAD, LIVE LOAD, and BETAD modifiers are used to specify data which in turn are
used to assign a value to Bd.
Example
SLENDERNESS EFFECTS FOR COLUMN 3 4 DEAD LOAD '*DL' 1.4 LIVE LOAD '*LL' 1.7
SLENDERNESS EFFECTS FOR BEAMS 6 7 8 27 31 REDUCE I BY 50. PERCENT
With reference to the structure in Figure 3.4.5-1, columns 3 and 4 are considered for
slenderness; the moment of inertias for beams connecting to the columns are reduced
to 50% of the gross I to account for cracking. The Bd is calculated based on the
factored dead and live loads.
3 - 104
3.9.2
PDELTA LOADING Command
PDELTA LOADING Command
command elements:
i1
integer PDELTA LOADING identifier,
'a1'
alternate alphanumeric PDELTA LOADING identifier,
i2, i3,..., in or
'a2', 'a3', ..., 'an'
loading condition identifiers,
vi (i-2,...,n)
contribution factor for the loading spec component of

the corresponding loading condition in the PDELTA
LOADING i1 or 'a1'. This factor may have any value,
negative or positive.
Explanation
The PDELTA analysis is a nonlinear analysis. It is necessary to restrict each PDELTA
analysis to a single independent loading condition, which is herein called a PDELTA
LOADING.
Example
PDELTA LOAD 'PD' COMBINE '*DL' 1.4 '*LL' 1.7
3 - 105
PDELTA ANALYSIS Command
3.9.3
PDELTA ANALYSIS Command
command elements:
i1
number of joints per partition
i2
number of equilibrium iterations
Explanation
The PDELTA analysis invoked by this command is essentially a geometrical nonlinear
analysis assuming linear elastic behavior, large finite displacements, small finite
strains, and small rotations.
3 - 106
3.10
DESIGN LOAD Command
DESIGN LOAD Command
DESIGN LOAD (SEISMIC GRAVITY) list
command element,
list
list of integer and/or alphanumeric names of independent or dependent

loadings.
Explanation
The DESIGN LOAD SEISMIC GRAVITY specifies each gravity loading which exists
when plastic, flexural hinges are expected to occur due to earthquake motions.
Many loadings may be active during flexure design of the member; only one or a few
of these loadings identify the gravity load condition which should be applied together
with the probable moment strength for seismic resistant shear calculations.
Example
METHOD ACI318-89 SEISMIC
UNITS KIPS FEET
$
LOADING 'DL' 'DEAD LOAD'
MEMBER LOADS
1 TO 20 FORCE Y UNIFORM W -1.0
3 - 107
DESIGN LOAD Command
LOADING 'LL' 'LIVE LOAD'

MEMBER LOADS
1 TO 20 FORCE Y UNIFORM W -1.5
LOADING 'E' 'SEISMIC APPLIED AT JOINTS'
JOINT LOADS
2 TO 50 BY 2 FORCE Z 0.5
$
LOAD COMBINATION 1 '1.4D+1.7L' COMBINE 'DL' 1.4 'LL' 1.7
LOAD COMBINATION 2 '.75(1.4D+1.7L+1.87E)' COMBINE 'DL' 1.05 'LL' 1.275 'E' 1.40
LOAD COMBINATION 3 '.9D+1.43L' COMBINE 'DL' 0.9 'E' 1.43
$
STIFFNESS ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 1 2 3
DESIGN LOAD SEISMIC GRAVITY 1 2
$
DESIGN DATA MEMBERS 1 TO 20
TYPE BEAM RECT
$
PROPORTION MEMBERS 1 TO 20 WITH DETAIL
The probable moment strengths, Mp, will be calculated at the start and end of the
beams. The gravity loads which act in conjunction with Mp are specified as loadings
1 and 2. These gravity loads plus the shear forces caused by Mp are used to construct
shear force envelopes for members 1 to 20.
3 - 108
Example Problem
3.11.
Reinforced Concrete Design by the ACI318-89 Design Code
Reinforced Concrete Design Example

by the ACI318-89 Design Code
A data file containing the GTSTRUDL commands for the example problem described
in this Chapter is supplied with GTSTRUDL. This file is described as Example 9 in
Table 3.1 of the GTSTRUDL User Guide: Getting Started manual.
The following example problem is described in this Chapter:
Because of GTSTRUDL's robust commmand language, powerful data base
management facilities, and breadth of technical features, it is not feasible to show all
the ways in which GTSTRUDL may be used. Rather, the above example is intended
to show how GTSTRUDL commands may be used to solve a simple and
straightforward reinforced concrete design problem.
3 - 109
Example Problem
Reinforced Concrete Design by the ACI318-89

Design Code
A simple plane frame structure example is shown in Figure 3.11-1. The GTSTRUDL
commands used to describe the structure, perform static analysis, perform design and
code checks of members by the ACI318-89 Reinforced Concrete Design Code, and
output selective results are shown in Table 3.11-1.
***************************************************************************************
Material = Reinforced Concrete (Compressive strength = 5.0 ksi)
Figure 3.11-1 Example - Reinforced Concrete Design by the ACI318-89 Design Code
3 - 110
Example Problem
Assumed Dimensions Prior to First Analysis
Figure 3.11-1
Example - Reinforced Concrete Design by the ACI318-89 Design Code

(Continued)
3 - 111
Figure 3.11-1
Example Problem

(Continued)
3 - 112
Example Problem
"
2
1
"
8
"
5
.2
6
3
"
5
.2
7
"
5
.3
7
*Note: Detailed output from PRINT ALL REINFORCEMENT command. Engineer must design
hooks and check anchorage for bars marked "continuous" at the start and end of each member.
Figure 3.11-1

(Continued)
3 - 113
Example Problem
Table 3.11-1 Example - Reinforced Concrete Design by the ACI318-89 Design Code
STRUDL 'EX. 9' 'REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN (BY THE ACI318-89 CODE) OF A PLANE
FRAME STRUCTURE'
$
$
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0. 0.
2 0. 14.
3 30. 14.
4 30. 0.
$
$
STATUS SUPPORT JOINTS 1 4
$
$
TYPE PLANE FRAME
MEMBER INCIDENCES
112
223
343
$ Material properties
METHOD ULTIMATE STRENGTH ACI318-89 BARS ASTM
UNITS INCH
CONSTANTS
FCP 5.0 MEMBERS 1 3 $ Compressive strength of columns
$ Member properties
UNITS INCH
MEMBER DIMENSIONS
1 RECTANGLE B 16 H 16
3 RECTANGLE B 16 H 24
2 TEE T 6 BF 72 B 12 H 18
PRINT MEMBER DIMENSIONS
3 - 114
Example Problem
(Continued)
$ Define member end eccentricities

MEMBER ECCENTRICITIES
2 GLOBAL START X 8.0 END X -12.0
1 3 GLOBAL END Y -9.0
DEAD LOAD 'SW' 'SELF WEIGHT OF FRAME MEMBERS' DIRECTION -Y ALL MEMBERS
UNITS FT
LOADING 1 'OTHER GRAVITY DEAD LOADS'
MEMBER LOADS
2 FORCE Y UNIFORM W -0.5
MEMBER LOADS
2 FORCE Y UNIFORM W -2.0
$ Define load combination using factored ultimate load factors
LOAD COMBINATION 'ULTIMATE' 'ULTIMATE LOADS' SPECS 'SW' 1.4 1 1.4 2 1.7
$ Output problem statistics
QUERY
$ Perform static analysis for all currently active loads
STIFFNESS ANALYSIS
$ Review results for the ultimate design load condition
LOAD LIST 'ULTIMATE'
$ Specify data required for RC design
UNITS INCH
DESIGN DATA MEMBER 2
TYPE BEAM TEE BFMAX 72.0 T 6.0
BARS BEAM TOP 8 9 BOTTOM 7
STIRRUP 3
COVER 1.5
DESIGN DATA MEMBERS 1 3
TYPE COLUMN RECTANGULAR TIED
BARS COLUMN 7 9 11
TIES 4
PRINT DESIGN DATA ALL
$ Proportion member sizes
$ Beam
PROPORTION MEMBER 2 GIVEN B 12.0 H 18.0 WITH DETAIL
$ Columns
PROPORTION MEMBER 1 GIVEN B 16.0 H 16.0 WITH DETAIL
PROPORTION MEMBER 3 WITH DETAIL $ ASSUME P = 0.02 (2 percent)
3 - 115
Example Problem
(Continued)
$ Output joint displacements in INCH units, and support reactions and member end
$
forces in KIPS and FT units, each ordered by loading condition
$
digits following the decimal point
LOAD LIST ALL
OUTPUT DECIMAL 3
UNITS INCH
LIST DISPLACEMENTS
UNITS FT
LIST REACTIONS
LIST SUM REACTIONS
LIST FORCES
$ Output member end forces ordered by member
OUTPUT BY MEMBER
LIST FORCES
$ Output member section forces for beam at 10th points for Design Load 'ULTIMATE'
LOAD LIST 'ULTIMATE'
SECTION FR DS 0.0 0.10 MEMBER 2
LIST SECTION FORCES MEMBER 2
$ Other output
UNITS INCH
SCHEDULE BEAMS ALL
SCHEDULE COLUMNS ALL
PLOT RC ALL
PRINT ALL REINFORCEMENT MEMBERS 1 2 3
QUANTITY TAKEOFF ALL
$
SAVE 'EX-9.SAV'
FINISH
3 - 116
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
Appendix A
Subset of GTSTRUDL Steel and Reinforced Concrete Design

Commands Ordered by Functional Area, and Ordered by Processing
Requirements in Each Area
Appendix B
Subset of GTSTRUDL Steel and Reinforced Concrete Design

Commands Ordered by Functional Area, and Ordered by Command
in Each Area
Appendix C
Steel Design Codes

C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
C.6
Appendix D
ASD9 Code Summary

LRFD2 Code Summary
BS449 Code Summary
BS5950 Code Summary
TOWER2 Code Summary
NF83 Code Summary
Section Properties Required for Steel Rolled Shape Design

D.1
D.2
D.3
D.4
D.5
ASD9 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties

LRFD2 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties
BS449 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties
TOWER2 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section
Properties
D.6 NF83 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties
Appendix E
Prestored Steel Rolled Shape Tables for Design
Appendix F
Steel Design Code PARAMETERS

F.1
F.2
F.3
ASD9 Code Parameters

LRFD2 Code Parameters
F.2.1
ASTM Steel Grades and Associated Values of Fy
and Fu Based on the 1989 AISC ASD Ninth
Edition, and the 1993 LRFD Second Edition
Specifications
BS449 Code Parameters
F.3.1
Steel Grades and Associated Allowable
Equivalent Stress (pe) and Yield Stress (Ys)
Based on the 1975 British Standard 449
Specification
Appendix - 1
APPENDICES
F.4
F.5
F.6

F.4.1
Steel Grades Based on the 1990 British
Standard 5950 Specification
F.4.2
Effective Length LE Used by the 1990 British
Standard 5950 Specification
TOWER2 Code Parameters
F.5.1
TOWER2
Code
Default
Values
of
PARAMETERS Determined by the Value of the
TYPE PARAMETER
F.5.2
Bolt TYPE and Associated Shear and Tensile
Strengths
NF83 Code Parameters
Appendix - 2
APPENDIX A
Steel and RC Design Commands Ordered by Processing Requirements
Appendix A
Ordered by Functional Area, and Ordered by Processing Requirements in
Each Area
This Appendix summarizes a subset of GTSTRUDL Steel and Reinforced Concrete

Design commands. The GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual (Table 1.2) should be
referred to for a complete description of all available commands and Graphical User
Interface (GT-MENU) features.
The commands summarized in this Appendix are ordered by functional area, and in
each functional area are ordered by processing requirements, as follows:
Table A-1 Subset of Steel Frame Design Commands Ordered by Processing
Requirements
Table A-2 Subset of Reinforced Concrete Frame Design Commands Ordered by
Processing Requirements
A-1
APPENDIX A
Table A-1 Subset of Steel Frame Design Commands Ordered by Processing Requirements
Engineering Requirement
Steel Design
Examples of GTSTRUDL Commands

SECTION
PARAMETERS
COLUMN LINE
ASME LOAD TYPE
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
SELECT MEMBERS
TAKE MEMBERS
CHECK CODE MEMBERS
SUMMARIZE DESIGN/CODE CHECK
STEEL TAKEOFF
PRINT
A-2
APPENDIX A
Table A-2 Subset of Reinforced Concrete Frame Design Commands Ordered by Processing
Requirements
Engineering Requirement
Examples of GTSTRUDL Commands

METHOD
CONSTANTS
MEMBER DIMENSIONS (PRISMATIC)
MEMBER DIMENSIONS VARIABLE
GRID DEFINITION
GRID MEMBER
FLOOR
WALL
END OF DEFINITION
FACE OF SUPPORT
DESIGN DATA
PROPORTION MEMBER
DETAIL
SEGMENT
SLAB SUPPORTS
JOINT DETAILS
MEMBER SIMILARITIES
ANALYZE and DESIGN
PRINT REINFORCEMENT
QUANTITY TAKEOFF
SLENDERNESS
PDELTA LOADING
PDELTA ANALYSIS
GIRDER
DESIGN LOAD
A-3
APPENDIX A
A-4
APPENDIX B
Steel and RC Design Commands Ordered by Command in Each Area
Appendix B
Ordered by Functional Area, and Ordered by Command in Each Area
This Appendix summarizes a subset of GTSTRUDL Steel and Reinforced Concrete

Design commands. The GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual (Table 1.2) should be
referred to for a complete description of all available commands and Graphical User
Interface (GT-MENU) features.
The commands summarized in this Appendix are ordered by functional area, and in
each functional area are ordered by command, as follows:
Table B-1 Subset of Steel Frame Design Commands Ordered by Command
Table B-2 Subset of Reinforced Concrete Frame Design Commands Ordered by
Command
B-1
APPENDIX B
Table B-1 Subset of Steel Frame Design Commands Ordered by Command
Command Name
Brief Description
SECTION
Specify locations along members at which internal

member forces and moments are to be computed, and
at which code checks are to be made.
PARAMETERS
Specify additional information required by various steel

design code specifications.
COLUMN LINE
Identifies lines of columns which are used in

subsequent automatic calculations of column effective
length factors KY and KZ.
ASME LOAD TYPE
Specify loading condition service limits provided for by

the ASME NF17 and NF83 design codes in
GTSTRUDL.
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS
Specify constraints on the cross-section dimensions of

steel rolled shapes to be designed.
SELECT MEMBERS
Cause the selection of the lightest steel rolled shapes,

from specified tables of available shapes, which satisfy
both design code specifications and member
constraint requirements.
TAKE MEMBERS
Performs design smoothing of an existing design.
CHECK MEMBERS
Causes an existing design to be checked against

design code specifications, and/or to be checked
against member constraint requirements.
SUMMARIZE DESIGN/
CODE CHECK results
Display results of design and code checking including

the details of specific code provision checks.
PRINT select and code check

control information, and steel
shape properties
Display current values of parameters and constraints

used, and display summary of all available parameters,
constraints, and summarize options, and display
current member sizes.
B-2
APPENDIX B
Table B-2 Subset of Reinforced Concrete Frame Design Commands Ordered by Command
Command Name
Brief Description
MATERIAL REINFORCED
CONCRETE
Initialize reinforced concrete capabilities and initialize

standard values of material properties and design
parameters.
METHOD
Specify additional information required for reinforced

concrete design such as code specification, bar data,
and seismic requirements.
CONSTANTS
Specify material and design properties used by

reinforced concrete design.
MEMBER DIMENSIONS
(PRISMATIC)
Specify cross-section shape and dimensions of

prismatic members.
MEMBER DIMENSIONS
VARIABLE
Specify cross-section shape and dimensions of

variable section members.
GRID DEFINITION
Automatic mesh generation command to define the

orthogonal grid planes of the structure to be generated.
GRID MEMBER

existence and location of members on the defined grid
planes.
FLOOR

location, geometry, and loading data which are used
for the generation of floor systems in orthogonal
buildings.
WALL

location, geometry, and loading data which are used
for the generation of rectangular cladding,
nonstructural wall systems in orthogonal buildings.
END OF DEFINITION
Causes the data specified by the GRID DEFINITION,

GRID MEMBER, FLOOR, and WALL commands to be
processed.
B-3
APPENDIX B
(continued)
Command Name
Brief Description
FACE OF SUPPORT
Specify the clear-span length of one-way solid and joist

floor systems.
DESIGN DATA
Specify information required by the PROPORTIONand

DETAIL commands.
PROPORTION MEMBER
Request the design of reinforced concrete members

and girders to be performed.
DETAIL
Request reinforced concrete detailing to be performed.
SEGMENT
Request segment processing for the design of flat

plates, flat slabs, and columns of a two-way slab and
column structure.
SLAB SUPPORTS
Specifies the slab-to-column conditions for slab-beam

members which are to be designed as flat plates or flat
slabs.
JOINT DETAILS
Specifies the size and location of the drop panels for

the design of flat slabs.
MEMBER SIMILARITIES
Specifies design detail similarities between different

groups of reinforced concrete members.
ANALYZE and DESIGN
Performs the analysis and design of members

designated as one way slab or joist types in a prior
DESIGN DATA command.
PRINT REINFORCEMENT
Prints the most detailed information concerning the

reinforcement which was selected and detailed by the
PROPORTION and DETAIL commands.
B-4
APPENDIX B
(continued)
Command Name
Brief Description
QUANTITY TAKEOFF
Computes the volume of concrete, the length and

weight of reinforcing bars, and the area of formwork for
the designed reinforced concrete frame structure.
SLENDERNESS
Identify reinforced concrete columns which will display

significant nonlinear behavior as a result of the
PDELTA effect and/or the influence of axial force on
bending stiffness.
PDELTA LOADING
Identifies independent loading conditions to be used in

the nonlinear PDELTA analysis.
PDELTA ANALYSIS
Perform a nonlinear geometric analysis assuming

linear elastic material behavior, large finite
displacements, small finite strains, and small rotations.
GIRDER
Define a girder as a collection of colinear contiguous

analysis members. Girders may then be designed as
reinforced concrete members.
B-5
APPENDIX B
B-6
Appendix C
Steel Design Codes
Appendix C
Steel Design Codes
Parameter
'CODE' Name
Appendix
Application
ASD9
C.1
Checks compliance of I, Single Angle, Channel, Tee, Double Angle,

Solid Round Bar, Pipe, Solid Square and Rectangular Bar, and
Structural Tubing shape profiles to the 1993 AISC ASD, Ninth
Edition, Specification. See Subsection C.1 below for more details.
LRFD2
C.2
Checks compliance of I (combined axial and biaxial bending, and

shear force checks), Single Angle (axial force checks only), and
Double Angle (axial force checks only) shape profiles to the 1993
AISC LRFD, Second Edition, Specification. See Subsection C.2
below for more details.
BS449
C.3
Checks compliance of I, Single Angle, Channel, Tee, Pipe, and

Structural Tubing shape profiles to the British Standard 449, Part 2
Metric Units, Specifications for the Use of Structural Steel in Building, British Standard Institution, October 1969, with amendments
through July 1975. See Subsection C.3 below for more details.
BS5950
C.4
Checks compliance of I, Single Angle, Channel, Tee, Double Angle,

Solid Round Bar, Pipe, Solid Square and Rectangular Bar, and
Structural Tubing shape profiles to the British Standard 5950, Part
1, Specifications for the Use of Structural Steel in Buildings, British
Standard Institution, adopted July 1990. See Subsection C.4 below
for more details.
TOWER2
C.5
Based on the ASCE Guide for Design of Steel Transmission Towers,

Second Edition, this code checks Single and Double Angle shapes
for axial stresses. See Subsection C.5 below for more details.
NF83
C.6
Based on the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III,
Division 1 - Subsection NF, Rules for Construction of Nuclear Power
Plant Components adapted on July 1, 1983, with Addenda through
Summer 1984. This code checks I, Channels, Single Angle, and
Structural Tubing shape profiles. See Subsection C.6 below for
more details.
C-1
Appendix C
Steel Design Codes
C-2
Appendix C.1
ASD9 Code Summary
Appendix C.1
ASD9 Code Summary
The ASD9 code is based on the AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings,
Allowable Stress Design" adopted June 1, 1989. The Specification is contained in the
Ninth Edition of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design. The
ASD9 Code utilizes the allowable stress design techniques of the AISC Specification.
A detailed description of all parameters and provisions of the AISC ASD
specification that are considered by GTSTRUDL is contained in Volume 2A of the
GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual.
A summary of parameters used by the ASD9 code in GTSTRUDL are given in
Appendix F.
The ASD9 code may be used to select or check any of the following shapes (Figure C1):
I shapes**
Channel
Single angle
Tee
Double angle
**Note:
Round bar
Pipe
Square bar
Rectangular bar
Structural tubing
The term "I shapes" is used to mean W, S, M, and HP profiles.
The following assumptions are made throughout the ASD9 Code.

1.
The member under consideration is rolled from a single grade of steel.
2.
The modulus of elasticity of the steel is 29,000 ksi. This is of particular

importance, since the computation of several constants appearing in the
equations of the AISC ASD Specification is based on this value.
3.
Torsional stresses are usually small when compared to axial and bending
stresses, and may be neglected. No checks are made for torsion. The designer
is reminded to check the torsional stresses whenever they become significant.
4.
Web stiffeners are considered for web shear stress, but they are not designed.
5.
Double angles contain an adequate number of intermediate connectors (stitch

plates) which make the two angles act as one, Tee-like section.
C-3
Appendix C.1
ASD9 Code Summary
6.
For a single angle subjected to combined stress, Section 6.1.1 of AISC ASD
cannot be satisfied. Section 6.1.1 of AISC ASD states that in the equations H1-1
or H1-2, the maximum compression bending stress due to each moment acting
alone must be used even though they may occur at different cross sections of the
member. The latter specification is not considered by GTSTRUDL's ASD9
member selection or code check procedures.
Tensile or compressive axial stresses, bi-axial bending, shear stresses, and combined
stresses are considered by ASD9. Provisions for slender compression elements,
Appendix B of the AISC ASD Specification, are included when necessary. Parameters
allowing for the changes which occur in structural steel at high temperatures have been
included and may be invoked at the user's discretion.
Cross-section properties for the steel shapes designed by the ASD9 Design Code
(Figure C-1) are described in Appendix D.
C-4
Appendix C.1
ASD9 Code Summary
Figure C-1 Local Axes for Design with ASD9
C-5
Appendix C.1
ASD9 Code Summary
Figure C-1 (continued) Local Axes for Design with ASD9
C-6
Appendix C.2
LRFD2 Code Summary
Appendix C.2
LRFD2 Code Summary
The LRFD2 code is based on the "AISC, Manual of Steel Construction, Load &
Resistance Factor Design, Second Edition, adopted December 1, 1993."
Parameters used by the LRFD2 code in GTSTRUDL are described in Appendix F. The
LRFD2 code may be used to select or check any of the following steel rolled shapes:
I shapes (Wide flange, S, HP, and M)
Single Angles
Double Angles
Subjected to bending and axial force.

Subjected to axial force only.
Subjected to axial force only.
A detailed description of all parameters and provisions of the AISC LRFD, Second
Edition, specification that are considered by GTSTRUDL will be contained in a future
revision of Volume 2A of the GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual.
It is very important to note that the AISC LRFD code check procedures contained in
GTSTRUDL (LRFD2) do not include the approximate moment magnification technique
discussed in Section C1 of the AISC, Manual of Steel Construction, Load & Resistance
Factor Design, Second Edition, adopted December 1, 1993" for determination of Mu (B1
and B2 factors) in lieu of a second order analysis. Such a technique assumes that the
analysis is performed on the basis of a first order linear geometric elastic analysis.
Rather, the AISC LRFD code checking provisions implemented into GTSTRUDL
("LRFD2") are the ones that are intended to use second order nonlinear geometric
elastic analysis results which are based on factored loads (i.e., limit state loadings).
Such second order nonlinear geometric elastic analysis may be performed by using the
GTSTRUDL NONLINEAR ANALYSIS feature (Section 2.5 of Volume 3 in the
GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual).
Cross-section properties for the steel shapes designed by the LRFD2 Design Code are
described in Appendix D.
C-7
Appendix C.3
BS449 Code Summary
Appendix C.3
BS449 Code Summary
The BS449 code is based on the British Standard Institute BS449 -1969/75,
Specification for "The Use of Structural Steel in Buildings". The BS449 Code is based
on allowable stress design procedures. A detailed description of all parameters and
provisions of the BS449 specification that are considered by GTSTRUDL is contained
in Volume 2B of the GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual.
The BS449 Code of GTSTRUDL may be used to select or check any of the following
shapes:
I shape
Channel
Tee (no bending)
Structural Tubing
Pipe
Single Angle (no bending)
Parameters used by the BS449 code in GTSTRUDL are summarized in Appendix F.

The following two assumptions are made throughout the BS449 Code:
1.
The member under consideration is rolled from a single grade of steel.
2.
The torsional stresses are usually small when compared to axial and bending
stresses, and may be neglected. No checks are made for torsion. The user is
reminded to check the torsional stresses whenever they become significant.
The following provisions of the BS449 Code are checked by GTSTRUDL:

1.
Maximum slenderness ratio. Refer to Sections 25 and 33 of the BS449.
2.
Allowable axial tension stress. Refer to section 41 of the BS449.
3.
Allowable axial compression stress. Refer to Section 30 of the BS449.
4.
Allowable shear stress. Refer to Section 23(b) of the BS449.
5.
Allowable bending stresses. Refer to Sections 19, 20, 21 of the BS449.
6.
Interaction equations. Refer to Section 14 of the BS449.
C-8
Appendix C.3
BS449 Code Summary
It is important to note that members designed or checked as Tees or single
angles must only be tension or compression members since bending is not
considered for these shapes by the BS449 code in GTSTRUDL.
Cross-section properties for the steel shapes designed by the BS449 Steel Design
Code are described in Appendix D.
C-9
Appendix C.4
BS5950 Code Summary
Appendix C.4
BS5950 Code Summary
This code is based on the "BS 5950, British Standard Structural Use of Steelwork in
Building, Part 1, Code of Practice for Design in Simple and Continuous Construction:
Hot Rolled Sections, Adopted July, 1990."
Parameters for the BS5950 steel design code are discussed in Appendix F.
The BS5950 Code in GTSTRUDL may be used to select or check any of the following
steel rolled shapes:
I shapes
Channels
Single Angles
Tees
Double Angles
Round Bars
Pipes
Square Bars
Rectangular Bars
Structural Tubing
C - 10
Appendix C.5
TOWER2 Code Summary
Appendix C.5
TOWER2 Code Summary
The TOWER2 code in GTSTRUDL is used to select or code check single and double
angle members used in steel transmission towers. The ASCE Manual and Report
on Engineering Practice No. 52, "Guide for Design of Steel Transmission Towers,"
Second edition, 1988, is the primary reference used in the development of TOWER2.
All equations for computing permissible tensile and compressive axial stresses have
been taken from the ASCE Guide.
Based on the provisions of the ASCE Guide, the TOWER2 code in GTSTRUDL is
intended for use with single and double angle shape members subject only to axial
stresses (i.e., PLANE TRUSS and SPACE TRUSS members). Bending, shear, and
torsion member forces are not considered. The number of bolts at the member end
connection, holes through a cross-section, shear stress in the bolts, and bearing stress
on the member are considered by TOWER2 based on user-defined parameters in
addition to the axial stress.
Parameters used by the TOWER2 code in GTSTRUDL are summarized in Appendices
F.5, F.5.1, and F.5.2.
Figure C-2 illustrates the orientation of the single and double angle axes used by the
TOWER2 Code.
Cross-section properties for the steel shapes used by the TOWER2 Steel Design Code
(Figure C-2) are described in Appendix D.5.
C - 11
Appendix C.5
TOWER2 Code Summary
Y and Z are principal axis.

X' and Y' are parallel to leg axis.
Figure C-2 Local Axes for Design with TOWER2
C - 12
Appendix C.6
NF83 Code Summary
Appendix C.6
NF83 Code Summary
The NF83 steel design code is based on the "ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section III, Rules for Construction of Nuclear Power Plant Components. Division 1 Subsection NF Component Supports," adopted in July 1, 1983, with Addenda through
the Summer of 1985. The specification is contained in the Appendices of the above
referenced Subsection NF in Article NF-3320, "Design by Linear Elastic Analysis for
Class I." A detailed description of all parameters and provisions of the ASME Code
specification that are considered by GTSTRUDL is contained in Volume 2B of the
GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual.
The NF83 Steel Design Code in GTSTRUDL may be used to select or check any of the
following shapes:
I shapes
Channel
Single angle
Structural tubing
Parameters used by the NF83 code in GTSTRUDL are described in Appendix F. The
following assumptions were made in implementing the NF83 Code in GTSTRUDL:
1.
The warping stresses computed by the NF83 code are based on Case 2 of
"Torsion Analysis of Rolled Steel Sections," Bethlehem Steel Corporation,
1963(55). GTSTRUDL considers four different sets of warping boundary
conditions under Case 2: 'PIN-PIN', 'PIN-FIX', 'FIX-PIN', and 'FIX-FIX'. See
Section 2.2.5.10.5, Volume 2B, of the GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual.
2.
The warping stresses computed by the NF83 code are based on the assumption
of a constant torsional moment, relative to the shear center, along the entire
length of the member. This assumption requires that no force of any kind be
applied between the ends of a member when the shear center is eccentric from
the centroid (i.e., channels and angles).
3.
The torsional moment computed by the stiffness analysis of GTSTRUDL is

assumed to be accurate for computing warping stresses. A more exact treatment
of warping would require an additional degree-of-freedom during the stiffness
analysis.
C - 13
Appendix C.6
NF83 Code Summary
4.
To comply with Section NF-3321.1(b) of the ASME Specification an upper limit

of 10/9 times the computed compressive bending stress is imposed. This value
insures that compressive bending stresses will not exceed two-thirds (2/3) of the
critical buckling stress for all service limits. The two-thirds (2/3) of critical
buckling stress limitation is also applied to compressive axial stress. See Section
2.2.5.10.6, Volume 2B, of the GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual, for a
description of how service limits are specified for each loading.
5.
A value of 29,000 ksi is recommended for steel, since this value was used in
deriving several of the constants appearing in the allowable stress equations of
the ASME Specification. For a detailed derivation of the constants and equations
the user is referred to the "Guide to Stability Design Criteria for Metal Structures."
6.
The member under consideration is rolled from a single grade of steel (i.e., no
hybrid members).
The engineer is urged to verify that the above assumptions are applicable. Any
variation from these assumptions should be checked by the engineer to ascertain their
impact on the NF83 Code.
Tensile or compressive axial stresses, bi-axial bending stresses, transverse shear
stresses, combined axial and bending stresses, torsional shear stress, warping shear
stress, warping normal stress, combined shear stresses and combined normal stress
are considered by the NF83 Code. Provisions for slender compression elements,
Section NF-3322.2(e) ASME Specification, are included when necessary.
Cross-section properties for the steel shapes used by the NF83 Steel Design Code are
described in Appendix D.6.
C - 14
Appendix D
Appendix D
Steel design codes in GTSTRUDL are developed to design (i.e., select from tables)
steel rolled shapes whose properties are described in this Appendix and in Volume 2A
of the GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual.
It is important to note that all cross-section properties described in this Appendix must
be included in the section tables from which the rolled shapes are selected. The rolled
section tables included with GTSTRUDL contain the required properties. User created
tables of steel rolled shapes must also include these properties.
See Section 2.13 of this GTSTRUDL User Guide: Design for a discussion of how to
create a user table of steel rolled shapes.
Appendix D.1
Appendix D.2
Appendix D.3
Appendix D.4
Appendix D.5
TOWER2 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties
Appendix D.6
NF83 Code Required Steel Rolled Shape Section Properties
D-1
Appendix D.1
Appendix D.1
Cross-section properties for the steel shapes designed by the ASD9 Design Code (Figure
C-1) are summarized below:
I Shape Properties:
For W shapes and other doubly symmetric I beams, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
=
=
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
RY
RZ
RT
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
SY
SZ
FLTK
WBTK
YD
YC
=
=
=
=
=
=
ZD
ZC
=
=
INTYD
BF/2TF
D/TW
YD/AFL
EY
EZ
CW
ND
WEIGHT
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
the cross-sectional area

the Y axis shear area computed as the profile depth times the web
thickness
the Z axis shear area computed as 2/3 of the total flange area
the torsional moment of inertia
the moment of inertia about the Y axis
the moment of inertia about the Z axis
the radius of gyration about the Y axis
the radius of gyration about the Z axis
the radius of gyration for the flange and 1/3 of the compression web
area about an axis in the plane of the web; for these shapes 1/3 of the
compression web area is 1/6 of the total web area
the section modulus about the Y axis
the section modulus about the Z axis
the flange thickness
the web thickness
the profile depth
the positive Y direction distance from the Z axis to the extreme fiber
along the Y axis (half of the profile depth)
the flange width
the positive Z direction distance from the Y axis to the extreme fiber
along the Z axis (half of the flange width)
the clear depth of the web computed as the profile depth minus twice
the b/t ratio of the flange computed as 1/2 the flange width divided by
the profile depth divided by the web thickness
the profile depth over the area of one flange
distance from centroid to shear center parallel to the Y axis
distance from centroid to shear center parallel to the Z axis
the warping constant
the nominal depth
the weight per unit length
D-2
Appendix D.1
GRPNUM
SHAPE
=
=
=
=
=
the profile group number taken from Table 1 and 2 of the AISC ASD
Manual of Steel Construction, Ninth Edition
a number that indicates the profile shape
1.0, W shapes
1.1, S shapes
1.2, HP shapes
1.3, M shapes
Channel Properties:
For channels, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
=
=
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
RY
RZ
SY
SYS
SZ
FLTK
WBTK
YD
YC
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
ZD
ZC
=
=
INTYD
BF/2TF
D/TW
YD/AFL
EY
EZ
CW
ND
WEIGHT
GRPNUM
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

thickness
the negative direction section modulus about the Y axis (IY/(ZD-ZC))
the positive direction section modulus about the Y axis (IY/ZC)
the web thickness
the profile depth
along the Y axis (half of the profile depth)
the flange width
along the Z axis (from Y axis to the web extreme fiber)
the b/t ratio of the flange computed as the total flange width divided by
the nominal depth
the profile group member taken from Tables 1 and 2 of the AISC ASD
D-3
Appendix D.1
SHAPE
=
=
=

2.0, American Standard Channels (C)
2.1, Miscellaneous Channels (MC)
Single Angle Properties:

(Note:
For single angles, as for all other shapes designed by GTSTRUDL, the crosssection area properties are with respect to its principal axes)
For single angle shapes, the following properties are required:

AX
AY
=
=
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
RY
RZ
SY
SYS
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
SZ
SZS
THICK
LEG1
LEG2
YD
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
YC

the y-shear area. AY is taken as a value that will produce the
maximum transverse shear stress from the equation FY/AY, where FY
is the y-shear force. In this case, AY is taken as the term
(IZ*THICK/QZ) computed at the location of the z-principle axis of the
angle, where QZ is the first moment of the area above the z-principle
axis about the z-principle axis.
the z-shear area. AZ is taken as a value that will produce the
maximum transverse shear stress from the equation FZ/AZ, where FZ
is the z-shear force. In this case, AZ is taken as the term
(IY*THICK/QY) computed at the location of the y-principle axis of the
angle, where QY is the first moment of the area above the y-principle
axis about the y-principle axis.
the positive direction section modulus about the Y axis (IY/ZC)
the negative direction section modulus about the Y axis (IY/(ZD-ZC)),
(note, if both legs are equal, LEG1 = LEG2, then SY = SYS)
the positive direction section modulus about the Z axis (IZ/YC)
the negative direction section modulus about the Z axis (IZ/(YD-YC))
the thickness of the single angle
the length of the longer leg
the length of the shorter leg
depth parallel to principal Y axis
LEG2cos (ALPHA)+THICKsin (ALPHA)
along the Y axis
D-4
Appendix D.1
ZD
ZC
=
=
=
ALPHA
EY
EZ
CW
WEIGHT
GRPNUM
=
=
=
=
=
=
SHAPE
=
=
depth parallel to principal Z axis

LEG1cos (ALPHA) + LEG2sin (ALPHA)
along the Z axis
the angle between the longer leg of the angle and the principal Z axis
distance from centroid to shear center parallel to the principal Y axis
distance from centroid to shear Center parallel to the principal Z axis
the warping constant, not available in GTSTRUDL's tables at this time
the profile group number taken from Tables 1 and 2 of the AISC ASD
3.0, single angles
Tee Properties:
For tee shapes, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
=
=
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
RY
RZ
RT
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
SY
SZ
SZS
FLTK
WBTK
YD
YC
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
ZD
ZC
=
=
INTYD

the Y axis shear area computed as 2/3 of the profile depth times web
thickness
the radius of gyration for the compression flange and 1/3 of the
compression stem area, taken about an axis in the plane of the web
(i.e., about Y axis)
the negative direction section modulus about the Z axis (IZ/(YD-YC))
the positive direction section modulus about the Z axis (IZ/YC)
the web thickness
the profile depth
along the Y axis (from Z axis to top-of-flange)
the flange width
along the Z axis (half of the flange width)
the clear depth of the web computed as the profile depth minus the
flange thickness
D-5
Appendix D.1
BF/2TF
D/TW
YD/AFL
EY
EZ
CW
ND
WEIGHT
GRPNUM
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
SHAPE
=
=
=
=
the nominal depth
4.0, WT Shapes
4.1, ST Shapes
4.3, MT Shapes
Double Angles Properties:

For double angle shapes, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
=
=
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
RY
RZ
SY
SZ
SZS
THICK
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
LEGl
LEG2
SPACING
YD
YC
=
=
ZD
the cross-section area

the Y-axis shear area computed as 2/3 of the profile depth times twice
the leg thickness
the Z-axis shear area computed as 2/3 of the total flange area
the section modulus about Y axis
the negative direction section modulus about Z axis (IZ/(YD-YC))
the positive direction section modulus about Z axis (IZ/YC)
the thickness of the flange (note: the thickness of both single angles
is assumed to be the same and uniform)
the length of the longer leg of each single angle which makes up the
double angle
the length of the shorter leg of each single angle which makes up the
double angle
the spacing between the single angles. When each angle is in
contact, SPACING equals zero
depth parallel to Y axis
along the Y axis
depth parallel to Z axis
D-6
Appendix D.1
ZC
EY
EZ
CW
GRPNUM
=
=
=
=
SHAPE
=
=
=
=
along the Z axis
the warping constant, not available in GTSTRUDL's tables at this time
4.4, equal legs back-to-back double angles
4.5, long legs back-to-back double angles
4.6, short legs back-to-back double angles
Solid Round Bar Shapes:

For solid round bars, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
RY
RZ
SY
SZ
YD
YC
ZD
ZC
GRPNUM
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
SHAPE
=
=

the Y axis shear area computed as 3/4 of AX
the Z axis shear area computed as 3/4 of AX
depth parallel to Y axis (diameter of bar)
distance to extreme fiber in positive Y direction (radius of bar)
depth parallel to Z axis (diameter of bar)
distance to extreme fiber in positive Z direction (radius of bar)
5.0, solid round bars
Pipe Shapes:
For pipe shapes, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
AZ
=
=
=

the Z axis shear area computed as 1/2 of AX
D-7
Appendix D.1
IX
IY
IZ
RY
RZ
SY
SZ
OD
ID
THICK
YD
YC
ZD
ZC
ND
GRPNUM
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
SHAPE
=
=

the outside diameter of the pipe
the inside diameter of the pipe
the thickness of the pipe
depth parallel to Y axis (OD)
distance to extreme fiber in positive Y direction (OD/2.0)
depth parallel to Z axis (OD)
distance to extreme fiber in positive Z direction (OD/2.0)
the nominal depth
5.1, pipes
Square and Rectangular Bar Shapes:

For square and rectangular bar shapes, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
RY
RZ
SY
SZ
YD
YC
ZD
ZC
GRPNUM
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
SHAPE
=
=
=

The Z axis shear area computed as 2/3 of AX
The radius of gyration about the Y axis
distance to extreme fiber in positive Y direction (YD/2)
distance to extreme fiber in positive Z direction (ZD/2)
6.0, square bars
6.1, rectangular bars
D-8
Appendix D.1
Structural Tubing Shapes:
For structural tubing, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
=
=
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
RY
RZ
SY
SZ
FLTK
WBTK
YD
YC
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
ZD
ZC
=
=
INTYD
INTZD
BF/TF
=
=
=
DW/TW
D/TW
EY
EZ
CW
ND
GRPNUM
=
=
=
=
=
=
SHAPE
=
=

the Y axis shear area computed as twice the web thickness times the
flat width of the web
the Z axis shear area computed as twice the flange thickness times
the flat width of the flange
the radius of gyration about Y axis
the radius of gyration about Z axis
the section modulus about Y axis
the section modulus about Z axis
the web thickness
the profile depth
along the Y axis (YD/2)
the profile width
along the Z axis (ZD/2)
the flat width of the web (YD-2FLTK-2radius)
the flat width of the flange (ZD-2WBTK-2radius)
the b/t ratio of the flange computed as the flat width of flange divided
by the flange thickness
the b/t ratio of the web computed as the flat width of web divided by
the web thickness
distance from centroid to shear center parallel to the Y axis,
distance from centroid to shear center parallel to Z axis
the warping constants
the nominal depth
6.2, structural tubing
It is assumed that the outside radius of the corners of a structural tube equals twice the
thickness of the tube:
radius
2 FLTK
D-9
Appendix D.2
Appendix D.2
Cross-section area properties for steel shapes that are used by the LRFD2 steel design code
include those described above in Appendix D.1 for the ASD9 Design Code.
In addition to such properties, the following cross-section area properties are also used by the
LRFD2 steel design code for bending and shear checks of members with I, Single Angle, and
Double Angle shape cross-sections:
For I, Single Angle, and Double Angle shapes:
ZY
ZZ
CW
=
=
=
Plastic modulus about the local Y axis.

Plastic modulus about the local Z axis.
Warping constant, CW. When CW is not specified for the cross-section
in the GTSTRUDL or user tables, the value of CW is computed based on
the following equation where,
For I shapes,
CW = ZD3 (YD-FLTK)2 (FLTK)/24.0
For Single Angle shapes,
CW = ((LEG1-THICK/2)3 + (LEG2 THICK/2)3) THICK3/36
For Double Angles shapes,
CW = 2 [((LEG1-THICK/2)3 + (LEG2 THICK/2)3) THICK3/36]
H/TW
web stability check computed as the assumed web depth for stability (h)
divided by the web thickness (tw), where h is the clear distance between
flanges less the fillet or corner radius for rolled shapes (see AISC
Manual of Steel Construction, Load & Resistance Factor Design, Second
Edition, December 1, 1993). When h/tw is not specified for the crosssection in the GTSTRUDL or user tables, the value of INTYD/tw is used.
INTYD is the clear distance between flanges and tw is the web thickness.
D - 10
Appendix D.2
SHAPE
A number which indicates the profile shape (see Table 2.4-2 in Volume
2A of the GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual).
1.0 for I shapes.
1.1 for S shapes.
1.2 for HP shapes.
1.3 for M shapes.
3.0 for Single angles.
4.4 for Double angle, equal legs back-to-back.
4.5 for Double angle, long legs back-to-back.
4.6 for Double angle, short legs back-to-back.
When using GTTABLE to create a user table of steel rolled shapes for use by the LRFD2
steel design code which include the section properties ZY and ZZ (plastic moduli), the
following GTTABLE commands (see Section 2.13) should be used:
ORDER USER TABLE 'Tablename'
FILE TABLE
D - 11
Appendix D
Appendix D.3
Cross-section area properties for steel shapes that are used by the BS449 steel design code
are summarized below:
I, Channel, Tee, and Structural Tubing Shape Properties:

For I, Channel, Tee, and Structural Tubing shape properties, the following properties are
required:
AX
AY
=
=
=
=
AZ
=
=
IX
IY
IZ
SY
SZ
RY
RZ
YD
YC
ZD
ZC
FLTK
WBTK
YD/AFL
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
EY
EZ
=
=
The cross-sectional area.

For I shapes and Channels, the Y-axis shear area computed as the
profile depth times the web thickness.
For Tees, the Y-axis shear area computed as 2/3 of profile depth times
the web thickness.
For Structural Tubing, the y-axis shear area computed twice the web
thickness times the flat width of the web.
For I shapes, Channels, and Tees, the Z-axis shear area computed as
2/3 the total flange area.
For Structural Tubing, the Z-axis shear area is computed as twice the
flange thickness times the flat width of the flange.
The torsional constant.
Y-axis moment of inertia.
Z-axis moment of inertia.
The section modulus about Y-axis.
The section modulus about Z-axis.
The radius of gyration about Y-axis.
The radius of gyration about Z-axis.
The profile depth.
Distance to extreme fiber in positive Y direction.
The flange width.
Distance to extreme fiber in positive Z direction.
The flange thickness.
The web thickness.
The profile depth over area of one flange. This property is required for
the W shape Channel, and Tee profiles.
Distance from centroid to shear center parallel to the Y-axis.
Distance from centroid to shear center parallel to the Z-axis.
D - 12
Appendix D.3
SHAPE
=
=
=
=
1.0, a number indicates the W shape profile.

2.0, a number indicates the Channel profile.
4.0, a number indicates the Tee profile.
6.2, a number indicates the Structural Tubing profile.
Pipe Shape Properties:

For pipes, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
OD
THICK
RY
RZ
SY
SZ
YD
YC
ZD
ZC
EY
EZ
SHAPE
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

The Y axis shear area computed as 1/2 of AX.
The Z axis shear area computed as 1/2 of AX.
Y axis moment of inertia.
Z axis moment of inertia.
The outside diameter of the pipe.
The thickness of the pipe.
The radius of gyration about the Y axis.
The radius of gyration about the Z axis.
The section modulus about the Y axis.
The section modulus about the Z axis.
The profile depth.
The profile width.
Distance from centroid to shear center parallel to the Y axis.
Distance from centroid to shear center parallel to the Z axis.
1.0, a number indicates the W shape profile.
2.0, a number indicates the Channel profile.
4.0, a number indicates the Tee profile.
6.2, a number indicates the Structural Tubing profile.
D - 13
Appendix D
Single Angle Shape Properties:
(Note:
For single angles, as for all other shapes designed by GTSTRUDL, the
cross-section area properties are with respect to its principal axes)
For single angles, the following properties are required:

AX
AY
=
=
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
THICK
LEG1
=
=
=
=
=

The shear area along the Y axis, taken as IZ*THICK/QZ in the
transverse shear stress equation VY*QZ/( IZ*THICK), where QZ = the
first moment of the area above the Z axis about the Z axis.
The shear area along the Z axis, taken as IY*THICK/QY in the
transverse shear stress equation VZ*QY/(IY*THICK), where QY = the
first moment of the area above the Y axis about the Y axis.
Y axis moment of inertia.
Z axis moment of inertia.
The thickness of the single angle.
The length of the longer leg.
LEG2
RY
RZ
SY
SZ
YD
YC
ZD
ZC
EY
SHAPE
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
The length of the shorter leg.

The radius of gyration about the Y axis.
The radius of gyration about the Z axis.
The positive direction modulus about the Y axis.
The positive section modulus about the Z axis.
The profile depth.
The profile width.
Distance from centroid to shear center parallel to the Y axis.
3.0, a number indicates the single angle profile.
D - 14
Appendix D
Appendix D.4
Cross-section area properties for steel shapes that are used by the BS5950 steel design
code include those described above in Appendix D.1 for the ASD9 Design Code.
In addition to such properties, the following cross-section area properties are also used
by the BS5950 steel design code:
For I-shapes, Channels, Tees, Pipes, and Structural Tubes:
ZY
ZZ
=
=
Plastic modulus about the local Y axis.

Plastic modulus about the local Z axis.
For I-shapes and Channels:

H or CW
Warping constant.
For I-shapes, Channels, and Tees:

X
Torsional index, (same as x in the BS 5950: Part 1: 1990 code). If not

specified, the torsional index is computed based on the equation given
in the Appendix B of BS 5950: Part 1: 1990 code.
Buckling parameter, (same as u in the BS 5950: Part 1: 1990 code). If
not specified, the buckling parameter is computed based on the equation
given in the Appendix B of BS 5950: Part 1: 1990 code.
For Double Angles:

ZY
ZZ
Plastic modulus about the local Y axis. If not specified, the elastic
modulus, SY, is used.
Plastic modulus about the local Z axis. If not specified, the elastic
modulus, SZ, is used, and the profile is checked as a single angle.
Torsional index, (same as x in the BS 5950: Part 1: 1990 code). If not
specified, the torsional index is computed based on the equation given
for a Tee cross-section in the Appendix B of BS 5950: Part 1: 1990 code.
Buckling parameter, (same as u in the BS 5950: Part 1: 1990 code). If
not specified, the buckling parameter is computed based on the equation
given for a Tee cross-section in Appendix B of the BS 5950: Part 1: 1990
code.
For Solid Round Bars, Solid Square Bars, and Solid Rectangular Bars:
D - 15
Appendix D
ZY
ZZ
=
=
Plastic modulus about the local Y axis. If not specified, it is computed.

Plastic modulus about the local Z axis. If not specified, it is computed.
For all profiles:

SHAPE
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
A number indicates the profile shape (see Table 2.4-2 of Volume 2A).
1.0 for I shapes.
1.2 for H shapes.
2.0 for Channels.
3.0 for Single angles.
4.0 for Tees
4.4 for Double angle, equal legs back-to-back.
4.5 for Double angle, long legs back-to-back.
4.6 for Double angle, short legs back-to-back.
5.0 for Solid round bars.
5.1 for Pipes.
6.0 for Solid square bars.
6.1 for Solid rectangular bars.
6.2 for Structural tubing.
D - 16
Appendix D
Appendix D.5
Cross-section area properties for steel shapes that are used by the TOWER2 steel
transmission tower design code are summarized below:
Single Angles Properties:

(Note:
For single angles, as for all other shapes designed by GTSTRUDL, the crosssection area properties are with respect to its principal axes)
AX
AY
=
=
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
RY
RZ
SY
SYS
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
SZ
THICK
LEG1
LEG2
YD
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
YC

the torsion moment of inertia
the radius of gyration about the major principal Y axis
the radius of gyration about the minor principal Z axis
the positive direction section modulus about the Y axis
the negative direction section modulus about the Y axis
(note, if both legs are equal, LEG1 = LEG2, then SY = SYS)
the positive direction section modulus about the Z axis
the thickness of the single angle
the length of the longer leg
the length of the shorter leg
depth parallel to principal Y axis
LEG2cos(ALPHA) + THICKsin(ALPHA)
along the Y axis
D - 17
Appendix D
ZD
ZC
=
=
=
ALPHA
EY
EZ
WEIGHT
GRPNUM
=
=
=
=
=
SHAPE
=
=
depth parallel to principal Z axis

LEG1cos(ALPHA) + LEG2sin(ALPHA)
along the Z axis
the angle between the longer leg of the angle and the principal Z axis
distance from centroid to shear center parallel to principal Z axis
Manual of Steel Construction
a number indicates the profile shape
3.0, single angles
In addition single angles require the following properties:

B/T
RXX
RYY
=
=
the controlling width-to-thickness ratio of the angle where the width is

taken as the distance from the edge of the fillet to the extreme fiber
the radius of gyration about the centroidal axis parallel to the short leg
the radius of gyration about the centroidal axis parallel to the long leg
Double Angles Properties:

For double angles, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
=
=
AZ
IX
IY
IZ
RY
RZ
SY
SZ
SZS
LEG1
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
LEG2
THICK
the cross-section area

the Y axis shear area computed as 2/3 of the profile depth times twice
the leg thickness
the torsion moment of inertia
the negative direction section modulus about Z axis
the positive direction section modulus about the Z axis
the length of the longer leg of the single angle which made up the
double angle
the length of the shorter leg of the single angle which made up the
double angle
the thickness of the flange (note: the thickness of both single angles
is assumed to be the same and uniform)
D - 18
Appendix D
YD
YC
=
=
ZD
ZC
=
=
SPACING
EY
EZ
GRPNUM
=
=
=
SHAPE
=
=
=
=

along the Y axis
along the Z axis
the spacing between the single angles. When the double angles are
in contact, SPACING equals zero
distance from centroid to shear center parallel to principal Z axis
Manual of Steel Construction
a number indicating the profile shape
4.4, double angles equal legs back-to-back
4.5, double angles long legs back-to-back
4.6, double angles short legs back-to-back
D - 19
Appendix D
Appendix D.6
Cross-section area properties for steel shapes that are used by the NF83 steel design
code are summarized below:
I Shape Properties:
For W shapes and other doubly symmetric I beams, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
=
=
AZ
ZD
YD
FLTK
WBTK
RY
RZ
SY
SZ
BF/2TF
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
D/TW
RT
=
=
EY
EZ
YD/AFL
INTYD
=
=
=
=
SHAPE
=
=
the cross-sectional area,

thickness,
the Z axis shear area computed as 2/3 of the total flange area,
the flange width,
the profile depth,
the flange thickness,
the web thickness,
the radius of gyration about the Y axis,
the radius of gyration about the Z axis,
the section modulus about the Y axis,
the section modulus about the Z axis,
the profile depth divided by the web thickness,
the radius of gyration for the flange and 1/3 of the compression web
area about an axis in the plane of the web; for these shapes, 1/3 of the
compression web area is 1/6 of the total web area,
distance from centroid to the shear center parallel to the Y axis,
distance from the centroid to the shear center parallel to the Z axis,
the profile depth over the area of one flange,
1.0, I shapes
D - 20
Appendix D
Channel Properties:
For channels, the following properties are required:
AX
AY
=
=
AZ
ZD
YD
FLTK
WBTK
RY
RZ
SY
SYS
SZ
BF/2TF
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
YD/AFL
EY
EZ
INTYD
=
=
=
=
IY
ZC
=
=
SHAPE
=
=

thickness,
the Z axis shear area computed as 2/3 of the total flange area,
the flange width,
the profile depth,
the web thickness,
the negative direction section modulus about the Y axis,
the positive direction section modulus about the Y axis,
the section modulus about the Z axis,
the b/t ratio of the flange computed as the total flange width divided by
the profile depth over the area of one flange,
the moment of inertia about the Y axis,
along the Z axis,
2.0, channel shapes
Single Angles Properties:

(Note:
For single angles, as for all other shapes designed by GTSTRUDL, the
cross-section area properties are with respect to its principal axes)
AX
AY
=
=

D - 21
Appendix D
AZ
THICK
LEGl
LEG2
RY
RZ
EY
EZ
SY
SYS
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
SZ
SZS
SHAPE
=
=
=
=

the thickness of the single angle,
the length of the longer leg,
the length of the shorter leg,
the positive direction section modulus about the Y axis,
the negative direction section modulus about the Y axis, (note, if both
legs are equal, LEGl = LEG2, then SY = SYS ),
the positive direction section modulus about the Z axis,
the negative direction section modulus about the Z axis,
3.0, single angle shapes
Structural Tubing Properties:

For structural tubing, Table AISCTUBE or TUBE80 for example the following properties
are required:
AX
AY
=
=
AZ
ZD
YD
FLTK
WBTK
RY
=
=
=
=
=

the Y axis shear area computed as twice the web thickness times the
flat width of the web,
the Z axis shear area computed as twice the flange thickness times
the flat width of the flange,
the profile width,
the profile depth,
the web thickness,
the radius of gyration about Y axis,
RZ
SY
SZ
EY
EZ
=
=
=
=
=
the radius of gyration about Z axis,

the section modulus about Y axis,
the section modulus about Z axis,
D - 22
Appendix D
BF/TF
DW/TW
D/TW
INTYD
INTZD
SHAPE
=
=
=
=
=
the b/t ratio of the flange computed as the flat width of flange divided
by the flange thickness,
the b/t ratio of the web computed as the flat width of web divided by
the web thickness,
the profile depth divided by the web thickness,
the flat width of the web,
the flat width of the flange,
6.2, structural tubing shapes
D - 23
Appendix D
D - 24
Appendix E
Appendix E
Prestored Steel Rolled Shape Tables for Design+*
Table
Name
Applicable
Codes
WSHAPES9
ASD9
LRFD2
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Properties of W shape profiles included in the 1989 AISC

ASD Manual of Steel Construction, Ninth Edition. Names of
profiles have the form of 'WaaXnnn' where:
aa
= nominal depth in inches, and
nnn
= weight in pounds per foot.
M/S/HP9
ASD9
LRFD2
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Properties of M, S, and HP shape profiles included in the

1989 AISC LRFD and ASD Manual of Steel Construction,
Ninth Edition. Names of profiles have the form of 'MaaXnnn',
'SaaXnn', and 'HPaaXnnn'
where,
aa
nnn
CHANNEL9
ASD9
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Properties of Channel shape profiles included in the 1989

AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Ninth Edition. Names of
profiles have the form of 'CaaXnnn' and 'MCaaXnnn' where:
aa
nnn
TEES9
ASD9
BS449
BS5950
Properties of Tee shape profiles included in the 1989 AISC ASD

Manual of Steel Construction, Ninth Edition. Names of
profiles have the form of 'WTaaXnnn', 'MTaaXnnn', and 'STaaXnnn'
where:
aa
nnn
Assumed directions of the local principle y and z axes are shown in Figure C-1 for
Table steel rolled shapes.
See the Sections 2.13.2 and 2.13.3 for a description of how to print out the contents
(i.e., profile names and properties) of tables, and to create user defined Tables of
steel shapes.
Description
E-1
Appendix E
Table
Name
Applicable
Codes
PIPES9
ASD9
BS449
BS5950
Properties of Pipe shape profiles included in the 1989 AISC

Manual of Steel Construction, Ninth Edition. Names of
profiles have the form of 'PaaaaSTD', 'PaaaaXS', and PaaaaXXS'
where:
aaaa
= nominal diameter of the pipe in inches
STD
= standard pipe
XS
= extra strong, and
XXS
= double extra strong.
TUBES9
ASD9
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Properties of Structural tubing shape profiles included in the

1989 AISC ASD Manual of Steel Construction, Ninth Edition
Names of profiles have the form of 'TSaawwtt', 'TsaXwXtt',
'TSaaXwtt' and 'TSaaXwXt' where:
a or aa
= nominal depth in inches
w or ww
= nominal width in inches, and
t or tt
= thickness in inches expressed as a whole number of
1/16 inch increments.
WBEAM9
ASD9
LRFD2
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Steel W shape profiles commonly used as beams as shown

on pages 2-7 to 2-13 of the AISC ASD Ninth Edition, 1989.
Names of profiles have the same form as for table
'WSHAPES9'
Description
WCOLUMN9 ASD9
LRFD2
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Steel W shape profiles commonly used as columns as shown

on pages 3-19 to 3-33 of the AISC ASD, Ninth Edition, 1989.
Names of profiles have the same form as for table
'WSHAPES9'
ANGLES
Properties of equal and unequal leg single angles about the

principle axes, from the 1969 AISC Manual of Steel
Construction. See Figure E-1 for an explanation of the
naming convention for angles. Note that properties are for
principal axes.
ASD9
LRFD2
TOWER2
NF83
BS449
BS5950
E-2
Appendix E
Table
Name
Applicable
Codes
EQANGLE
ASD9
LRFD2
TOWER2
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Equal leg angles taken from the 'ANGLES' table. Analysis

and design properties are the same as for the 'ANGLES'
Table (Figure C-1). See Figure E-1 for an explanation of the
naming convention.
ULANGLE
ASD9
LRFD2
TOWER2
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Unequal leg angles taken from the 'ANGLES' Table. Analysis

properties are the same as for the 'ANGLES' Table (Figure C1). Design properties for unbraced lengths are associated with
the long leg parallel to the local Y'-design axis, which is the
same as for the 'ANGLES' Table as shown in Figure C-2.
See Figure E-1 for an explanation of the naming convention.
USANGLE
ASD9
LRFD2
TOWER2
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Unequal leg angles taken from the 'ANGLES' Table. Analysis

properties are the same as for the 'ANGLES' Table (Figure C1). However, design properties for unbraced lengths are not
the same. Unbraced length properties (L/r) are associated
with the short leg parallel to the Y'-design axis, which is the
reverse of what is in the 'ANGLES' Table. See Figure E-1 for an
explanation of the naming convention.
LLDBLANG
SLDBLANG
EQDBLANG
ASD9
LRFD2
TOWER2
BS5950
Properties of double angles from 1969 AISC Manual of

Steel Construction. Tables contain long legs back-to-back,
short legs back-to-back, and equal legs back-to-back
respectively. See Figure E-1 for an explanation of the naming
convention.
SSPIPE
ASD9
BS449
Stainless steel pipe profiles as shown in ANSI B36.19-1976.

Profile names use the form 'PaXbS' where:
a =
outside diameter in inches,
b =
pipe schedule number
WSPIPE
ASD9
BS449
Welded and Seamless steel pipe profiles as shown in ANSI

B36.10-1979. Profile names use the form 'PaXb' where:
a =
nominal diameter in inches,
b =
weight per linear foot in pound/ft.
Description
E-3
Appendix E
Table
Name
Applicable
Codes
BARS
ASD9
BS5950
Properties of round and square solid bar shape profiles

(Figure C-1). Names of profiles have the form of 'BRSQaabb' and
'BRRDaabb' where:
aa =
side of a square bar or diameter of a round bar in whole
number of inches,
bb =
additional size of the bar above aa expressed as a whole
number of 1/16 inch increments,
SQ =
square solid bar, and
RD =
round solid bar.
RBAR
ASD9
BS5950
Properties of rectangular solid bar shape profiles (Figure C-1).

Names of profiles have the form of 'Baabbcdd' where:
aa =
width of bar in a whole number of inches,
bb =
additional dimension of bar width as a whole number of
1/16 inch increments
c =
thickness of bar in a whole number of inches,
dd =
additional dimension of bar thickness as a whole number of
1/16 inch increments.
(Include leading zeros for all numbers).
CIHOLLOW
ASD9
BS5950
British Circular Hollow sections taken from the Steelwork Design

Guide to BS 5950: Part 1: 1990, Volume 1, Section Properties,
Member Capacities, 4th Edition, 1996 (82). Names of sections have
the form of outside-diameterXthickness. The decimal value for the
outside-diameter is dropped but the thickness decimal value is kept.
Example: 21.3X3.2 is 21X3.2 in GTSTRUDL
114.3X3.6 is 114X3.6 in GTSTRUDL
REHOLLOW ASD9
BS5950
British Rectangular Hollow sections taken from the Steelwork Design

the form of HeightWidthThickess. When the height is greater than or
equal to 100 and the thickness is greater than or equal to 10, the
decimal value of the thickness is dropped (120X80X10.0 is changed
to 1208010). When the height and the width is greater than or equal
to 100, the decimal value of the thickness is dropped (150X100X5.0
is changed to 1501005).
Example: 50X25X2.5 is 50252.5 in GTSTRUDL
200X100X12.5 is 20010012 in GTSTRUDL
Description
E-4
Appendix E
Table
Name
Applicable
Codes
Description
SQHOLLOW ASD9
BS5950
British Square Hollow sections taken from the Steelwork Design Guide
to BS 5950: Part 1: 1990, Volume 1, Section Properties, Member
Capacities, 4th Edition, 1996 (82). Names of sections have the form
of HeightXThickness.
Example: 20X20X2.0 is 20X2.0 in GTSTRUDL
JOISTS
ASD9
BS5950
British Joists sections taken from the Steelwork Design Guide to BS

5950: Part 1: 1990, Volume 1, Section Properties, Member Capacities,
4th Edition, 1996 (82). Names of sections have the form of
serialXmass.
Example: 254X203X82 is 254X82 in GTSTRUDL
UNIBEAMS
ASD9
BS5950
British Universal Beams sections taken from the Steelwork Design

the form of serialXmass . Some cross-sections due to the name
conflict do not follow the above naming convention. These crosssections are:
457X191X82, 457X191X74, 457X191X67,
457X152X82, 457X152X74, 457X152X67 and the GTSTRUDL names
are: 45719182, 45719174, 45719167, 45715282, 45715274,
45715267.
UNICOL
ASD9
BS5950
British Universal Columns sections taken from the Steelwork Design

the form of serialXmass.
E-5
Appendix E
Table
Name
Applicable
Codes
Description
New AISC Metric* Single and Double Angles

(*Metric Properties of Structural Shapes, with Dimensions According to ASTM A6M, American
Institute of Steel Construction Inc., Chicago, Illinois, 1992)
ANGLESM
ASD9
LRFD2
TOWER2
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Metric AISC equal and unequal single angle profiles as shown on

pages 40 to 49 of the Metric Properties of Structural Shapes*.
Examples of the naming convention is as follows:
L203x203x28.6 is 20320328 in GTSTRUDL,
EQDBANGM ditto
Metric AISC equal leg double angle profiles as shown on pages 74 to

77 of the Metric Properties of Structural Shapes by AISC*. Only
double angles back-to-back with 0 spacing is available at this time.
See Figure C-1 for explanation of naming convention.
LLDBANGM
ditto
Metric AISC unequal leg, long legs back-to-back double angle profiles
as shown on pages 78 to 81 of the Metric Properties of the Structural
Shapes by AISC*. Only double angles back-to-back with 0 spacing is
available at this time. See Figure C-1 for explanation of naming
convention.
SLDBANGM
ditto
Metric AISC unequal leg, short legs back-to-back double angle profiles
as shown on pages 82 to 85 of the Metric Properties of Structural
Shapes by AISC*. Only double angles back-to-back with 0 spacing is
available at this time. See Figure C-1 for explanation of naming
convention.
New AISC Metric* Channels

CHANNELM
ASD9
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Metric AISC Channel profiles as shown on pages 34 to 39 of the

Metric Properties of Structural Shapes*. Example of the naming
convention is as follows:
C380x74 is C380X74 in GTSTRUDL
MC460x77.2 is MC460X77 in GTSTRUDL
MC250x9.7 is MC250X9 in GTSTRUDL
E-6
Appendix E
Table
Name
Applicable
Codes
Description
New AISC Metric* Pipes

PIPESM
ASD9
BS449
BS5950
Metric AISC Pipe profiles as shown on page 97 of the Metric

Properties of Structural Shapes*. Example of the naming
Standard 13 mm in Nominal Diameter is P13STD in GTSTRUDL,
Extra Strong 64 mm in Nominal Diameter is P64XS in GTSTRUDL,
Double-Extra Strong 203 mm in Nominal Diameter is P203XXS in
GTSTRUDL.
New AISC Metric* Tees

TEESM
ditto
Metric AISC Tee profiles as shown on pages 52 to 71 of the Metric

Properties of Structural Shapes*. Example of the naming convention
is as follows:
WT460x267 is T460x267 in GTSTRUDL
WT380x128.5 is T380x128 in GTSTRUDL
MT155x8.8 is MT155X8 in GTSTRUDL
ST305x90 is ST305X90 in GTSTRUDL
New AISC Metric* Tubes

TUBESM
ASD9
NF83
BS449
Metric AISC Structural Tubing profiles as shown on pages 88 to 96 of

the Metric Properties of Structural Shapes*. Example of the
naming convention is as follows:
406x406x15.9 is 40640615 in GTSTRUDL,
51x51x4.8 is 51514 in GTSTRUDL
508x305x12.7 is 50830512 in GTSTRUDL
76x51x4.8 is 76514 in GTSTRUDL
New AISC Metric* Wide Flange and Universal Shapes

M/S/HPM
ASD9
LRFD2
NF83
BS449
BS5950
Metric AISC M, S, and HP profiles as shown on pages 28 to 33 of the

Metric Properties of Structural Shapes*. Example of the naming
M310x17.6 is M310X17 in GTSTRUDL
S460x81.4 is S460X81 in GTSTRUDL
HP360x174 is H360X174 in GTSTRUDL
E-7
Appendix E
Table
Name
Applicable
Codes
WBEAMM
ditto
Metric AISC W shapes commonly used as beams as shown on pages

2-7 to 2-13 of the AISC ASD Ninth Edition, 1989 (72). Example of the
naming convention is as follows:
W920x1262 is 920X1262 in GTSTRUDL
W920x967 is W920X967 in GTSTRUDL
W360x33 is W360x33 in GTSTRUDL
WCOLUMNM ditto
Metric AISC W shapes commonly used as columns as shown on

pages 3-19 to 3-33 of the AISC ASD Ninth Edition, 1989 (72).
Example of the naming convention is as follows:
W360x990 is W360X990 in GTSTRUDL
WSHAPESM ditto
Metric AISC W shapes as shown on pages 4 to 27 of the Metric

Properties of Structural Shapes*. Example of the naming convention
is as follows:
Description
New British** Single and Double Angles

(**Steelwork Design Guide to BS5950: Part 1: 1990, Volume 1, Section Properties, Member
Capacities, 4th Edition, Steel Construction Institute in association with the British Constructional
Steelwork Association Limited, British Steel PIC, Berkshire, England, 1996)
BSEQANGL
BS5950
British equal single angle profiles as shown on pages 54 and 55 of the

Steelwork Design Guide to BS 5950: Part 1: 1990, Volume 1 Section
Properties**. Example of the naming convention is as follows:
250x250x35 is 25025035 in GTSTRUDL
25x25x3 is 25253 in GTSTRUDL,
BSUNANGL
BS5950
British unequal single angle profiles as shown on page 56 of the

E-8
Appendix E
Table
Name
Applicable
Codes
BSEQDBAN
BS5950
British equal leg double angle profiles as shown on page 57 of the

250x250x35 with 0 back-to-back spacing is 2525350 in GTSTRUDL,
120x120x8 with 10 mm back-to-back spacing is 1212810 in
GTSTRUDL
60x60x10 with 15 mm back-to-back spacing is 661015 in GTSTRUDL
BSLLDBAN
BS5950
British long leg double angle profiles as shown on page 59 of the

200x150x18 with 0 back-to-back spacing is 2015180 in GTSTRUDL
BSSLDBAN
BS5950
British short leg double angle profiles as shown on page 58 of the

200x150x18 with 12 back-to-back spacing is 20151812 in GTSTRUDL
Description
New British** Channels

BSCHAN
BS5950
British Channel profiles as shown on pages 48 and 49 of the

Steelwork Design Guide to BS 5950: Part1: 1990, Volume 1 Section
Properties**. Example of the naming convention is as follow:
432x102x65.54 is 432X02 in GTSTRUDL
76x38x6.70 is 76X38 in GTSTRUDL
New British** Tees

TEEUBEAM
BS5950
British Structural Tee profiles cut from Universal Beams as shown on

pages 68 to 71 of the Steelwork Design Guide to BS 5950: Part 1:
1990, Volume 1 Section Properties**. Example of the naming
305x457x127 is 305X127 in GTSTRUDL
E-9
Appendix E
Table
Name
Applicable
Codes
TEEUCOLU
BS5950
Description
British Structural Tee profiles cut from Universal Columns as shown
on pages 72 to 73 of the Steelwork Design Guide to BS 5950: Part 1:
1990, Volume 1 Section Properties**. Example of the naming
New British** Wide Flange and Universal Shapes

UBPILES
BS5950
British Universal Bearing Pile profiles as shown on page 40 of the

Steelwork Design Guide to BS 5950: Part 1: 1990, Volume 1, Section
Additional Specialized Tables

Additional steel rolled shape tables are supplied with GTSTRUDL. The GTSTRUDL
User Reference Manual should be referred to for a more complete description of all
such additional tables.
E - 10
Appendix E
General
Form
Description
XX =
and
UN - unequal leg single angle from Table

'ANGLES'
UL - unequal leg single angle from Table
'ULANGLE'
US - unequal leg single angle from Table
'USANGLE'
EQ - equal leg single angle
Ln - long legs back-to-back double angle
Sn - short legs back-to-back double angle
En - equal legs back-to-back double angle
n - back-to-back spacing in 1/8 inch
increments
Examples
b
= length of LEG1 in whole inches
= additional length for LEG1 in 1/4 inch

increments
= length of LEG2 in whole inches
= additional length for LEG2 in 1/4 inch

increments
EE = thickness of angle in 1/32 inch increments

with leading zero
Examples
a) UN302216 is a single angle 3 x 2 1/2 x 1/2
b) L2806014 is a double angle long legs back-to-back 8 x 6 x 7/16 with 1/4" separation
c) E3404008 is a double angle equal legs back-to-back 4 x 4 x 1/4 with 3/8" separation
Figure E-1 Angle Naming Convention
E - 11
Appendix E
E - 12
Appendix F
Steel Design Code PARAMETERS
Appendix F
Steel Design Code Parameters
Appendix
F.1
Appendix
F.2
F.2.1

ASTM Steel Grades and Associated Values of Fy and Fu Based
on the 1989 AISC ASD Ninth Edition and the 1993 LRFD
Second Edition Specifications
Appendix
F.3
F.3.1

Steel Grades and Associated Allowable Equivalent Stress (pe)
and Yield Stress (Ys) Based on the 1975 British Standard 449
Specification
Appendix
F.4
F.4.1

Steel Grades Based on the 1990 British Standard 5950
Specification
Effective Length LE Used by the 1990 British Standard 5950
Specification
F.4.2
Appendix
Appendix
F.5
F.5.1
F.5.2

TOWER2 Code Default Values of PARAMETERS Determined
by the Value of the TYPE PARAMETER
Bolt TYPE and Associated Shear and Tensile Strengths
F.6
F-1
Appendix F.1
ASD9 Code PARAMETERS
Appendix F.1
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Meaning (See GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual, Vol. 2A

for More Detail)
CODE
Required
Identifies the code to be used for member checking or member

selection. Specify "ASD9" for code name. See Appendix C,
Subsection C.1 - ASD9 Code Summary, for a more detailed
description.
TBLNAM
WSHAPES9
Identifies the table of profiles to be used during selection. See

Appendix E for choices.
CODETOL
0.0
Percent variance from 1.0 for compliance with the provisions of a

code. The ratio of Actual/Allowable must be less than or equal to
[1.0 + CODETOL/100].
PF
1.0
Area reduction factor for HOLESOUT in members subject to axial

tension.
A/H
10000.0
Ratio of clear span between transverse stiffeners to clear distance

between flanges. Used in computing allowable shear stress.
Default approximates infinity.
General:
Material Properties:
STEELGRD
A36
Identifies the grade of steel from which a member is made. See

Appendix F.2.1 for steel grades and their properties.
FYLD
Computed
Yield stress of member. Computed from STEELGRD if not given.
FTS
Computed
Minimum tensile strength of member. Computed from STEELGRD

if not given.
REDFYLD
1.0
Reduction factor for FYLD. This factor times FYLD gives the FY
value used by the code. Used to account for property changes at
high temperatures.
F-2
Appendix F.1
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
REDFTS
1.0
Reduction factor for FTS. Similar to REDFYLD.
REDE
1.0
Reduction factor for E, the modulus of elasticity. Similar to

REDFYLD.
Slenderness Ratio:
SLENCOMP
Computed
Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (KL/r) for member

subjected to axial compression. When no value is specified for this
parameter, the value of 200 is used for the maximum slenderness
ratio.
SLENTEN
Computed
Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (L/r) for member subjected

to axial tension. When no value is specified for this parameter, the
value of 300 is used for the maximum slenderness ratio.
Effective Length K-Factors:

COMPK
NO
Parameter to request the computation of the effective length factors

KY and KZ (Sections 2.3 and 2.4).
YES = Compute KY and KZ factors. See the COLUMN LINE
command (Section 2.4).
KY = Compute KY only.
KZ
= Compute KZ only.
NO = Use default or specified values for KY and KZ.
KY
1.0
Effective length factor for buckling about the local Y axis of the
profile. See Sections 2.3 and 2.4 for the GTSTRUDL computation
of the effective length factor, KY.
KZ
1.0
Effective length factor for buckling about the local Z axis of the
of the effective length factor, KZ.
F-3
Appendix F.1
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
SDSWAYY
YES
Indicates the presence or absence of sidesway about the local Y

axis.
YES = sidesway permitted.
NO = sidesway prevented.
SDSWAYZ
YES
Indicates the presence or absence of sidesway about the local Z

axis.
NO = sidesway prevented.
GAY
Computed
G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAY is used in the

calculation of effective length factor KY (see parameter COMPK,
KY, and Sections 2.3 and 2.4).
GAZ
Computed
G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAZ is used in the

calculation of effective length factor KZ (see parameter COMPK,
KZ, and Sections 2.3 and 2.4).
GBY
Computed
G-factor at the end joint of the member. GBY is used in the

GBZ
Computed
G-factor at the end joint of the member. GBZ is used in the

Buckling Length:
LY
Computed
Unbraced length for buckling about the local Y axis of the profile.
Computed as length of member.
LZ
Computed
Unbraced length for buckling about the local Z axis of the profile.
FRLY
1.0
Fractional form of the parameter LY, allows unbraced length to be

specified as fractions of the total length. Used only when LY is
computed.
F-4
Appendix F.1
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
FRLZ
1.0
Fractional form of the parameter LZ, similar to FRLY. Used only

when LZ is computed.
Flexural-Torsional Buckling:
FLTORBUK
YES
Indicates the consideration of flexural-torsional buckling check.

YES = check flexural-torsional buckling.
NO = do not check flexural-torsional buckling.
KX
1.0
Effective length factor for torsional buckling about the local X axis
of the profile. This parameter is used in flexural-torsional buckling
stress, Fe computations.
LX
Computed
Unbraced length for torsional buckling about the local X axis of the
profile. Computed as length of member. This parameter is used in
flexural-torsional buckling stress, Fe computations.
FRLX
1.0
Fractional form of the parameter LX, allows unbraced length to be

specified as fractions of the total length. Used only when LX is
computed.
Bending Stress:
CB
Computed
Coefficient used in computing allowable compressive bending

stress (AISC ASD Ninth Ed. Section F1.3).
FSB
2.0
Safety factor applied to the Eq. 6.23 of the Guide to Stability Design
Criteria for Metal Structures (35) in the computation of allowable
compressive bending stress for the stem of a tee.
UNLCF
Computed
Maximum unbraced length of the compression flange. Computed

as length of member. In this parameter no distinction is made
between the unbraced length for the top or bottom flange. See
UNLCFTF or UNLCFBF.
F-5
Appendix F.1
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
FRUNLCF
1.0
Fractional form of the parameter UNLCF, allows maximum

unbraced length to be specified as fractions of the total length.
Used only when UNLCF is computed.
UNLCFTF
Computed
Maximum unbraced length of the compression flange for the top

flange. When no value is specified, UNLCF and FRUNLCF is used
for this parameter.
UNLCFBF
Computed
Maximum unbraced length of the compression flange for the bottom

flange. When no value is specified, UNLCF and FRUNLCF is used
for this parameter.
Combined Stresses:
AXEFF
0.0
Axial stress reduction factor indicating the amount of the axial

stress which is to be deducted from a corresponding bending stress
acting in the opposite direction.
CMY
Computed
Coefficient which modifies Y axis bending stress in interaction

equation (AISC ASD Ninth Ed. Section H1).
CMZ
Computed
Coefficient which modifies Z axis bending stress in interaction

equation (AISC ASD Ninth Ed. Section H1).
Force Limitation
FXMIN
0.5(lb)
Minimum axial force to be considered by the code; anything less in

magnitude is taken as zero.
FYMIN
0.5(lb)
Minimum Y-shear force to be considered by the code; anything less

in magnitude is taken as zero.
FZMIN
0.5(lb)
Minimum Z-shear force to be considered by the code; anything less

MYMIN
20.0(in-lb)
Minimum Y-bending moment to be considered by the code;

anything less in magnitude is taken as zero.
MZMIN
20.0(in-lb)
Minimum Z-bending moment to be considered by the code;

F-6
Appendix F.1
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
Output Processing and System Parameters:

UNITS
CODEUNIT
The UNITS value of ACTIVE specifies that the currently active units
are to be used for the output of code provision values and other
numerical output for summary output caused by the SELECT,
CHECK, and SUMMARY commands, and for output associated
with a TRACE value of 4.0. The default is to use standard code
units.
CODEUNIT = Output in standard code units.
ACTIVE
= Output in currently active units.
MXTRIALS
500.0
Maximum number of profiles to be tried when designing a member.

Default is larger than the number of profiles in most tables.
PRIDTA
1.0
Flag for requesting output from selection procedure.

1.0
= no output
2.0
= output parameters
SUMMARY
NO
Indicates if SUMMARY information is to be saved for the member.

Choices are YES or NO; See Sections 2.9 and 7.2 of Volume 2A for
explanation.
TRACE
4.0
Flag indication when checks of code provisions should be output

during design or code checking. See Section 7.2 of Volume 2A for
explanation.
1.0
= never
2.0
= on failure
3.0
= all checks
4.0
= controlling Actual/Allowable values and section forces.
VALUES
1.0
Flag indication if parameter or property values are to be output

when retrieved. See Section 7.2 of Volume 2A for explanation.
1 = no output
2 = output parameters
3 = output properties
4 = output parameters and properties.
F-7
Appendix F.2
LRFD2 Code PARAMETERS
Appendix F.2
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
CODE
Required

selection. Specify LRFD2 for code name.
TBLNAM
WSHAPES9

Appendices C.2 and E for choices.
CODETOL
0.0

[1.0 + CODETOL/100].
PF
1.0
A/H
10000.0
Area reduction factor for holesout in members subject to axial

tension.
Ratio of clear span between transverse stiffeners to clear distance
between flanges. Used in computing allowable shear stress.
Default approximates infinity.
FRAXMINT*
FRAXMINC*
1.0
The minimum required cross-sectional area is computed as follows:
General
AXreq,T
= FX / (FRAXMINT * FYLD)
= Minimum required area based on axial tension force
AXreq,C
= FX / (FRAXMINC * FYLD)
= Minimum required area based on axial compression
force
F-8
Appendix F.2
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
FRSZMIN*
1.2
The minimum required principle z-axis section modulus is computed

as follows:
SZreq
FRSYMIN*
1.2
The minimum required principle y-axis section modulus is computed

as follows:
SYreq
*Note:
= MZ / (FRSZMIN * FYLD)
= Minimum required principle z-axis section modulus
based on z-bending moment
= MY / (FRSYMIN * FYLD)
= Minimum required principle y-axis section modulus
based on y-bending moment
In order to improve the efficiency of steel member shape selection from a table of
available shapes that is ordered on increasing weight, it is important to begin the
process of checking shapes for code compliance by using a shape that is as close
as possible to the final selected shape. GTSTRUDL selects the first shape in a
table of shapes to be checked for code compliance by selecting the first shape in
the table whose cross-section area and section modulus properties are equal to or
greater than the minimum required properties as computed by AXreq, SYreq, and
SZreq.
Material Properties
STEELGRD
A36

FYLD
Computed
FTS
Computed

if not given.
REDFYLD
1.0
high temperatures.
F-9
Appendix F.2
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
REDFTS
1.0
Reduction factor for FTS. Similar to REDFYLD.
REDE
1.0

REDFYLD.
Slenderness Ratio
SLENCOMP
Computed
Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (KL/r) for member

subjected to axial compression. When no value is specified for this
parameter, the value of 200 is used for the maximum slenderness
ratio.
SLENTEN
Computed

NO

YES
= Compute KY and KZ factors. See the COLUMN LINE
KY
= Compute KY only.
KZ
= Compute KZ only.
NO
= Use default or specified values for KY and KZ.
K-Factors
COMPK*
*Note:
The concept of leaning columns has not been

implemented in the automatic computation of KY and KZ
factors.
KY
1.0
profile. See Sections 2.3 and 2.4 for GTSTRUDL computation of
effective length factor, KY.
KZ
1.0
profile. See Section 2.3 and 2.4 for GTSTRUDL computation of
effective length factor, KZ.
F - 10
Appendix F.2
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
SDSWAYY
YES

axis.
YES
= sidesway permitted.
NO
= sidesway prevented.
SDSWAYZ
YES

axis.
YES
NO
GAY
Computed
G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAY is used in the

GAZ
Computed
G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAZ is used in the

GBY
Computed

GBZ
Computed

Buckling Length
LY
Computed
LZ
Computed
FRLY
1.0

specified as a fraction of the total length. Used only when LY is
computed.
F - 11
Appendix F.2
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
FRLZ
1.0

Flexural-Torsional Buckling
KX
1.0
Effective length factor for torsional buckling about the local X axis
of the profile. This parameter is used in flexural-torsional buckling
stress, Fe computations.
LX
Computed
Unbraced length for torsional buckling about the local X axis of the
profile. Computed as length of member. This parameter is used in
flexural-torsional buckling stress, Fe computations.
FRLX
1.0

specified as a fraction of the total length. Used only when LX is
computed.
Bending Stress
CB
Computed
Coefficient used in computing allowable compressive bending

stress (1993 AISC LRFD, Second Ed., Section F1.2a, Equation F13).
UNLCF
Computed
Maximum unbraced length of the compression flange. Computed

as length of member. In this parameter no distinction is made
between the unbraced length for the top or bottom flange. See
UNLCFTF or UNLCFBF.
FRUNLCF
1.0
Fractional form of the parameter UNLCF, allows maximum

unbraced length to be specified as a fraction of the total length.
Used only when UNLCF is computed.
UNLCFTF
Computed
Maximum unbraced length of the compression flange for the top

flange. When no value is specified, UNLCF or FRUNLCF is used
for this parameter.
UNLCFBF
Computed
Maximum unbraced length of the compression flange for the bottom

flange. When no value is specified, UNLCF or FRUNLCF is used
for this parameter.
F - 12
Appendix F.2
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
Force Limitation
FXMIN
0.5(lb)

FYMIN
0.5(lb)

FZMIN
0.5(lb)

MYMIN
20.0(in-lb)
Minimum Y-bending moment to be considered by the code;

MZMIN
20.0(in-lb)
Minimum Z-bending moment to be considered by the code;

Output Processing and System Parameters

SUMMARY
NO

Choices are YES or NO; See Sections 2.9 and 7.2 of Volume 2A for
explanation.
TRACE
4.0
Flag to indicate when checks of code provisions should be output

explanation.
1.0 =
never
2.0 =
on failure
3.0 =
all checks
4.0 =
controlling Actual/Allowable values and section forces.
VALUES
1.0
Flag to indicate when parameter or property values are to be output

when retrieved. See Section 7.2 of Volume 2A for explanation.
1.0 =
no output
2.0 =
output parameters
3.0 =
output properties
4.0 =
output parameters and properties.
F - 13
Appendix F.2.1
ASTM Steel Grades (ASD9 and LRFD2 Codes)
Appendix F.2.1
ASTM Steel Grades and Associated Values of Fy and Fu Based on the
1989 AISC ASD Ninth Edition and 1993 AISC LRFD Second Edition
Specifications
ASTM
Steel Grade
Designation
Group Number Per ASTM A6

Fy, Minimum Yield Stress (ksi)
Fu Ultimate Tensile Stress (ksi)
1
A36
36
58
36
58
36
58
36
58
36
58
A529
42
60
NA
NA
NA
NA
A441
50
70
50
70
46
67
42
63
42
63
A572-G42
42
60
42
60
42
60
42
60
42
60
A572-G50
50
65
50
65
50
65
50
65
50
65
A572-G60
60
75
60
75
NA
NA
NA
A572-G65
65
80
NA
NA
NA
NA
A242
50
70
50
70
46
75
42
63
42
63
A588
50
70
50
70
50
70
50
70
50
70
NA indicates that shapes in the corresponding group are not produced for that grade of steel. GTSTRUDL assumes Fy
and Fu to be zero in such cases and will not select profiles for these combinations of group number and steel grade. Yield
strengths (Fy) and ultimate tensile strengths (Fu) were obtained from the summary of ASTM specifications included in
the 1989 AISC ASD Ninth Edition and the 1993 AISC LRFD Second Edition specification.
F - 14
Appendix F.3
BS449 Code PARAMETERS
Appendix F.3
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
CODE
Required

selection. Specify BS449 for code name. See Section 2.2.5.12 of
Volume 2B for a more detailed description.
TBLNAM
WSHAPES9 Identifies the table of profiles to be used during selection. See

Appendix E for other choices.
CODETOL
0.0

[1.0 + CODETOL/100].
PF
1.0

tension.
General
Material Properties
STEELGRD
43

FYLD
Computed
REDFYLD
1.0
high temperatures.
Slenderness Ratio
KL/R
Computed
Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (KL/r) for member subjected

to axial force. When no value is specified for this parameter, the
F - 15
Appendix F.3
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
COMPK
NO

YES = Compute KY and KZ factors. See the COLUMN LINE
KY
= Compute KY only.
KZ
= Compute KZ only.
NO
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
SDSWAYY
YES

axis.
NO
SDSWAYZ
YES

axis.
NO
GAY
Computed
G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAY is used in the calculation of effective length factor KY (see parameter COMPK, KY, and
Sections 2.3 and 2.4).
GAZ
Computed
G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAZ is used in the calculation of effective length factor KZ (see parameter COMPK, KZ, and
K-Factors
F - 16
Appendix F.3
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
GBY
Computed

calculation of effective length factor KY (see parameter COMPK, KY,
and Sections 2.3 and 2.4).
GBZ
Computed

calculation of effective length factor KZ (see parameter COMPK, KZ,
Buckling Length
LY
Computed
LZ
Computed
FRLY
1.0

computed.
FRLZ
1.0

Bending Stress
UNLCF
Computed
Unbraced length of the compression flange. Computed as length of

member.
FRUNLCF
1.0
Fractional form of the parameter UNLCF, allows unbraced length to

be specified as fractions of the total length. Used only when UNLCF
is computed.
F - 17
Appendix F.3
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
Force Limitation
FXMIN
2.224(N)

FYMIN
2.224(N)

FZMIN
2.224(N)

MYMIN
88.964
Minimum Y-bending moment to be considered by the

(mm-N)
code; anything less in magnitude is taken as zero.
MZMIN
88.964
Minimum Z-bending moment to be considered by the

(mm-N)

SUMMARY
NO

Choices are YES or NO; see Sections 2.9 and 7.2 of Volume 2A for
explanation.
TRACE
4.0

explanation.
1.0
= never
2.0
= on failure
3.0
= all checks
4.0
VALUES
1.0
Flag indication if parameter or property values are to be output when

retrieved. See Section 7.2 of Volume 2A for explanation.
1.0
= no output
2.0
= output parameters
3.0
= output properties
4.0
= output parameters and properties.
F - 18
Appendix F.3.1
Steel Grades Based on the BS449 Design Code
Appendix F.3.1
Steel Grades and Associated Allowable Equivalent Stress (pe), and
Yield Stress (Ys) Based on the 1975 British Standard 449 Specification
Thickness
Steel Grade
mm
pe
inches
N/mm
Yield Stress Ys
2
N/mm
psi
less than or equal

431
40.0
1.575
230.0
250.0
36263.152
Greater than
431
33109.834
40.0
1.575
501
210.0
228.0
320.0
347.8
50453.081
390.0
423.9
61489.692
360.0
391.3
56759.716
less than or equal

551
40.0
1.575
Greater than
551
40.0
1.575
pe
Allowable Equivalent Stress
Ys
pe 1.0869565
Steel grade name must be specified within single quotation marks in the PARAMETERS
Command.
F - 19
Appendix F.4
Appendix F.4
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
CODE
Required

selection. Specify BS5950 for code name.
TBLNAM2
WSHAPES9

Appendix E for a list of available table names.
General
APPROACH EXACT
Identifies the design approach. This parameter indicates the type of

approach that should be used for the combined stresses.
BOTH
Use the simplified and the more exact approach.

See Sections 4.8.3.3.1 and 4.8.3.3.2 of BS 5950:
Part 1: 1990.
EXACT
Use the more exact approach. See Section

4.8.3.3.2 of BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990.
SIMPLIFY =
Use simplified approach. See Section 4.8.3.3.1 of

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990.
GTSTRUDL applicable Table names for the BS5950 Design Code are as follows:
British Tables UNIBEAM (Universal Beams) and UNICOL (Universal Columns) are available on
request, plus AISC Tables WSHAPES9, M/S/HP9, CHANNEL9, ANGLES, EQANGLE, ULANGLE,
USANGLE, TEES9, LLDBLANG, SLDBLANG, EQDBLANG, BARS, RBAR, TUBES9, WBEAM9,
and WCOLUMN9.
F - 20
Appendix F.4
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
COLUMNS
NORMAL
Identifies the type of construction. This parameter is used to indicate

the columns in simple construction.
NORMAL = Equivalent slenderness, LT, is computed based on
the Appendix B.2.5 of BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990.
SIMPLE
= Columns in simple construction. Equivalent
slenderness, LT, is computed based on the Section
4.7.7 of BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990.
SHRAREAF
Computed
Shear area factor is used for the computation of the shear area (Av).
When an alternate value other than COMPUTE or TABLE is
specified, shear area is computed as the SHRAREAF times the
cross-sectional area (Ax) as follows:
Av = AY = AZ = [SHRAREAF AX].
COMPUTE
= Compute the shear area based on the Section
4.2.3 of BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 except for
single and double angles. Shear area for single
and double angles is extracted from
GTSTRUDL or USER table.
TABLE
= Shear area from GTSTRUDL or USER table is
used.
CODETOL
0.0

code. The ratio of actual/allowable must be less than or equal to [1.0
+ CODETOL/100].
PF
1.0

tension.
FRAXMINT*
FRAXMINC* 1.0
The minimum required cross-sectional area is computed as follows:

AXreq,T =
=
FX / (FRAXMINT * FYLD)
Minimum required area based on axial tension force
AXreq,C =
=
FX / (FRAXMINC * FYLD)
Minimum required area based on axial compression
force
F - 21
Appendix F.4
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
FRSZMIN*
1.2
The minimum required principle z-axis section modulus is computed

as follows:
Szreq
FRSYMIN*
1.2
MZ / (FRSZMIN * FYLD)
Minimum required principle z-axis section modulus
based on z-bending moment
The minimum required principle y-axis section modulus is computed

as follows:
Syreq
*Note:
=
=
=
=
MY / (FRSYMIN * FYLD)
Minimum required principle y-axis section modulus
based on y-bending moment
In order to improve the efficiency of steel member shape selection from a table of
available shapes that is ordered on increasing weight, it is important to begin the
process of checking shapes for code compliance by using a shape that is as close
as possible to the final selected shape. GTSTRUDL selects the first shape in a
table of shapes to be checked for code compliance by selecting the first shape in
the table whose cross-section area and section modulus properties are equal to or
greater than the minimum required properties as computed by AXreq, SYreq, and
SZreq.
Material Properties
STEELGRD
43

Appendix F.4.1 for Steel Grades and their properties.
PY, Py, or py Computed
Yield stress (design strength Py) of member. If not given, Computed

from parameter STEELGRD if not given.
REDPY,
1.0
REDPy, or redpy
Reduction factor for PY. This factor times PY gives the design
strength value (REDPY x Py) used by the BS5950 design code in
GTSTRUDL. Generally used to account for material property
changes at high temperatures.
REDE
Reduction factor for Young's Modulus of Elasticity E. Similar to

REDPY.
1.0
F - 22
Appendix F.4
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
Slenderness Ratio
SLENCOMP Computed
Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (KL/r) for a member

subjected to axial compression. The default value for maximum
compression slenderness ratio is equal to 180.
SLENTEN
Computed
Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (L/r) for a member subjected

to axial tension. Only a user specified value will initiate the
slenderness ratio check for a tension member.
FRLEY
1.0
Fraction value used for the computation of nominal effective length,

LEY = FRLEY LY. Nominal effective length, LEY, is used in the
computation of maximum slenderness ratio about the local Y axis of
the profile. See Section 4.7.2, Table 24 of BS 5950: Part 1: 1990 for
the FRLEY values.
FRLEZ
1.0
Fraction value used for the computation of nominal effective length,

LEZ = FRLEZ LZ. Nominal effective length, LEZ, is used in the
computation of maximum slenderness ratio about the local Z axis of
the profile. See Section 4.7.2, Table 24 of BS 5950: Part 1: 1990 for
the FRLEY values.
Effective Length K-Factors:

COMPK
NO
Parameter to request the automatic computation of the effective

length factors KY and KZ (Sections 2.3 and 2.4).
YES
= Compute KY and KZ factors.
KY
= Compute KY only.
KZ
= Compute KZ only.
NO
KY
1.0
member.
KZ
1.0
member.
F - 23
Appendix F.4
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
SDSWAYY
YES
Indicates the presence or absence of SiDeSWAY about the local Y

axis. This parameter is used for K-factor computation only.
YES
NO
SDSWAYZ
YES
Indicates the presence or absence of SiDeSWAY about the local Z

axis. This parameter is used for K-factor computation only.
YES
NO
GAY
Computed
G-factor at the start of the member. GAY is used in the calculation

of effective length factor KY.
GAZ
Computed
G-factor at the start of the member. GAZ is used in the calculation of

effective length factor KZ.
GBY
Computed
G-factor at the end of the member. GBY is used in the calculation of

effective length factor KY.
GBZ
Computed
G-factor at the end of the member. GBZ is used in the calculation of

effective length factor KZ.
Buckling Length
LY
Computed
LZ
Computed
FRLY
1.0

computed.
FRLZ
1.0

F - 24
Appendix F.4
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
Lateral Torsional Buckling

LATTORBU
YES
Indicates the consideration of LATeral TORsional BUckling check

(see Appendix B of BS5950 : Part 1 : 1990).
YES
= check lateral torsional buckling.
NO
= do not check lateral torsional buckling.
N or n
1.0
Slenderness correction factor, n. This parameter is used for the

computation of equivalent slenderness, LT = nuv.
LE
LY
Effective length of a member when lateral torsional buckling is

considered. Default value is equal to the unbraced length for
buckling about the local Y axis, LY. See Appendix F.4.2 for
alternative values.
FRLE
1.0
Fractional value used for the computation of the effective length of a

member, LE. Used only when default value of LY is used for
parameter LE (LE = FRLE LY. See Appendix F.4.2 and the
parameter LE).
Combined Stresses
AXEFF
0.0
Axial stress reduction factor indicating the amount of the axial stress
which is to be deducted from a corresponding bending stress acting
in the opposite direction.
MY or my
Computed
Equivalent uniform moment factor (m) which modifies Y axis bending

stress in combined axial and bending stress equation.
See Figure F.4-1 for computation of the default value for the
parameter MY.
MZ or mz
Computed
Equivalent uniform moment factor (m) which modifies Z axis bending

stress in combined axial and bending stress equation.
See Figure F.4-1 for computation of the default value for the
parameter MZ.
F - 25
Appendix F.4
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
DESTLDY3
YES
Indicates the presence or absence of a Destabilizing Load which

causes movement in the member local Y axis direction (and possibly
rotation about the member local Y axis). Destabilizing load conditions
exist when a load is applied to the local Z axis of a member and both
the load and the member are free to deflect laterally (and possibly
rotationally also) relative to the centroid of the member.
YES
= destabilizing load.
NO
= normal load.
DESTLDZ4
YES
Indicates the presence or absence of a Destabilizing Load which

causes movement in the member local Z axis direction (and possibly
rotation about the member local Z axis). Destabilizing load conditions
exist when a load is applied to the top flange (local Y axis load) of a
member and both the load and the flange are free to deflect laterally
(and possibly rotationally also) relative to the centroid of the member.
YES
= Destabilizing load.
NO
= Normal load.
Force Limitation
FXMIN
2.224 (N)

magnitude is taken as zero. Units are in newtons (N).
FYMIN
2.224 (N)

FZMIN
2.224 (N)

MYMIN
88.964
(mm-N)
Minimum Y-bending moment to be considered by the

Only the "LOADS list" or the "ALL LOADS" option of the PARAMETERS command are
applicable to parameter DESTLDY.
4
Only the "LOADS list" or the "ALL LOADS" option of the PARAMETERS command are
applicable to parameter DESTLDZ.
F - 26
Appendix F.4
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
MZMIN
88.964
(mm-N)
Minimum Z-bending moment to be considered by the

Output Processing
SUMMARY
NO

explanation.
TRACE
4.0
Flag indicating when checks of code provisions should be output

explanation.
1.0 = never
2.0 = on failure
3.0 = all checks
4.0 = controlling Actual/Allowable values and section forces.
VALUES
1.0
Flag indicating if parameter or property values are to be output when

retrieved. See the GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual, Volume 2A,
Section 7.2 for a more complete explanation.
1.0 = no output
2.0 = output parameters
3.0 = output properties
4.0 = output parameters and properties.
F - 27
Appendix F.4
Notes:
1. The value of m is computed for the I shapes, channels, and structural tubing
only.
2. When the specified value for the parameter 'n' (factor n of BS 5950: Part 1:
1990) is not equal to 1.0, the value for mz is set equal to 1.0.
3. The destabilizing load can be specified by the parameters DESTLDY and
DESTLDZ.
4. is the ratio of the smaller member end moment to the larger member end
moment.
Figure F.4-1
Computation of my and mz Parameters
F - 28
Appendix F.4.1
Steel Grades Based on the BS5950 Design Code
Appendix F.4.1
Steel Grades Based on the
1990 British Standard 5950 Specification
Steel Grade
Thickness,
less than
or equal to
(mm)
Yield Strength
Py
FYLD
(N/mm2)
43
16.0
275.0
40.0
265.0
63.0
255.0
100.0
245.0
16.0
355.0
40.0
345.0
63.0
340.0
100.0
325.0
16.0
450.0
25.0
430.0
40.0
415.0
63.0
400.0
50
55
F - 29
Appendix F.4.2
Effective Length (LE) Used by the BS5950 Design Code
Appendix F.4.2
Effective Length LE Used by the
1990 British Standard 5950 Specification
Conditions of restraint at
supports
Alternate values
for Parameter
LE
Default value for parameter LE
Loading conditions
Normal
Destabilizing
DESTLDZ = NO
DESTLDZ = YES
FRLE*LY
FRLE*LY
LY
Compression flange laterally restrained beam fully restrained against torsion

Both flanges fully restrained
against rotation on plan
A1
0.7LY
0.85LY
Both flanges partially restrained

against rotation on plan
A2
0.85LY
1.0LY
Both flanges free to rotate on

plan
A3
1.0LY
1.2LY
Compression flange laterally unrestrained, both flanges free to rotate on plan

Restraint against torsion
provided only by positive
connection of bottom flange to
supports
A4
1.0LY + 2D*
1.2LY + 2D*
Restraint against torsion

provided only by dead bearing
of bottom flange on supports
A5
1.2LY + 2D*
1.4LY + 2D*
Depth of Cross-Section (Table property "YD")

Example:
PARAMETERS
DESTLDZ
DESTLDZ
LE
LE
NO
YES
A2
LOAD 2
LOAD 5
MEMBER 1
A5
MEMBER 8
F - 30
$
$
$
$
LE
LE
LE
LE
=
=
=
=
O.85LY for load 2 and

1.0LY for load 5
1.2LY+2D for load 2 and
1.4LY+2D for load 5
Appendix F.5
TOWER2 Code PARAMETERS
Appendix F.5
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
CODE
Required

selection. Specify TOWER2 for code name. See Section TOWER2
of Volume 2A for a more detailed description.
TBLNAM
WSHAPES9 Identifies the table name of a table of profiles to be used during

selection. See Appendix D for other choices.
CODETOL
0.0
General:

[1.0 + CODETOL/100].
Material Properties:
STEELGRD
A36

FYLD
Computed
FTS
Computed

if not given.
Type of the Member:

TYPE
OTHER
Describes the structural function of a member.

OTHER, LEG, DBLANGLE, and TENCOMP.
Choices are:
Slenderness Ratio:
SLENCOMP Computed
Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (KL/r) for member subjected

to axial compression. The default value is determined from the
TYPE parameter. See Appendix F.5.1.
F - 31
Appendix F.5
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
SLENTEN
Computed

CONCNLD
Computed
Indicates if ends of member are concentrically loaded. Default is

based on the TYPE parameter, see Appendix F.5.1. Choices are:
NONE, BOTH, ONE, or NA
RESTRAIN
Computed
Indicates if ends of member are adequately restrained against

rotation. Default is based on the TYPE parameter, see Appendix
F.5.1. Choices are: NONE, BOTH, ONE, or NA.
KL/R
Computed
Controlling KL/r used to compute allowable axial compressive stress.

See Section TOWER2 for details on how it is computed.
Buckling Length:
LX
Computed
Unbraced length for buckling about the X parallel leg axis of the
single angle profile (Figure C-2). Computed as length of member.
LY
Computed
Unbraced length for buckling about the Y parallel leg axis of the
single angle profile, and about the Y principle axis of the double
angle profile (Figure C-2). Computed as length of member.
LZ
Computed
Unbraced length for buckling about the local Z principle axis of both
the single and double angle profiles (Figure C-2). Computed as
length of member.
FRLX
1.0

specified as fractions of the total length. Used only when LX is
computed.
FRLY
1.0

computed.
FRLZ
1.0

F - 32
Appendix F.5
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
25.0
Maximum permissible value of W/T ratio (flange width to thickness

ratio, table property B/T).
W/T Ratio:
W/TMAX
Number of Bolts Computations:

LEGBOLTD
Computed
Indicates leg of angle to be bolted. Default is based on the TYPE

parameter, see Appendix F.5.1. Choices are: NONE, ONE, LONG,
SHORT, B-B, and BOTH.
HOLESOUT
Computed
Number of holesout in any one cross-section of member. A value of

ALWSCOMP means that the SELECT and CHECK commands will
always compute the number of holesout. If a number of holesout is
specified, it will not be changed by GTSTRUDL. See Appendix
F.5.1. Choices are: ALWSCOMP or alternate value.
HOLE/ROW
12.0
Maximum number of bolts per row.

computing the number of holesout.
This number is used in
NUMBOLTS Computed
Number of bolts to be used in a member. A value of ALWSCOMP

means that the SELECT and CHECK commands will always
compute the number of bolts. If a number of bolts is specified, it will
not be changed by GTSTRUDL. Choices are: ALWSCOMP or
alternate value
GAGE
0.0
The transverse spacing of adjacent holes in the direction of the load.
PITCH
0.0
The longitudinal spacing of adjacent holes parallel to the direction of

the load.
MAXNMBLT 100
Maximum number of bolts allowed to be placed in a member.
F - 33
Appendix F.5.1
TOWER2 Code Default TYPE PARAMETERS
Appendix F.5.1
TOWER2 Code Default Values of PARAMETERS
Determined by the Value of the TYPE PARAMETER
Default
Specified TYPE
OTHER, TENCOMP
LEG
DBLANGLE
BERSURF
1.0
1.0
2.0
CONCNLD
NONE
NA
BOTH
HOLESOUT
1.0
2.0
2.0
LEGBOLTD
LONG
BOTH
B-B
RESTRAIN
NONE
NA
BOTH
SLENCOMP
200.0
150.0
200.0
0.9
1.0
1.0
SINGLE
DOUBLE
DOUBLE
Parameter
TENFACT
TYPSHEAR
NA = Not Applicable
Note:
For the purpose of determining defaults:
OTHER and TENCOMP
LEG
DBLANGLE
are treated as a single angle bolted on one face.

is a single angle bolted on both faces and used as a leg
member of a tower.
is used for double angle members.
F - 36
Appendix F.5
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
Factors and Parameters for Stress Computations:

ANETFACT
0.85
Factors multiplied by the net area for tension stress computation.
DIABOLT
0.625(in)
Diameter of bolts used in connection at end of member.
PF
1.0

tension.
PUNCHHOL 0.125(in)
The difference between the diameter of the punched hole and the
diameter of the bolt.
TENFACT
Computed
Factor multiplied by the FYLD to compute allowable tensile stress.

Computed from LEGBOLTD if not specified. See Appendix F.5.1.
Shear and Bearing Stress Computations:
BOLTTYPE
A394
ASTM specification for type of bolt to be used. See Appendix F.5.2

for bolt types and their properties. Choices are: A394, A307, and
A325.
BOLTSHR
Computed
Yield strength of bolts subject to single shear. Computed from

BOLTTYPE if not specified.
BOLTTENS
Computed
Tensile strength of bolts.

specified.
TYPSHEAR
Computed
Specified if bolts at the member end connections are in SINGLE or

DOUBLE shear. Default is based on the TYPE parameter. See
Appendix F.5.1. Choices are: SINGLE and DOUBLE.
BEARNGF
1.5
Multiplied times the value of FYLD to get the allowable bearing

strength of the member.
BERSURF
Computed
Surface area factor in the computations of total bearing.

Appendix F.5.1.
F - 34
Computed from BOLTTYPE if not
See
Appendix F.5
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
Output Processing and System Parameters:

SUMMARY
NO

explanation.
TRACE
4.0

explanation.
1.0
= never
2.0
= on failure
3.0
= all checks
4.0
VALUES
1.0

1.0
= no output
2.0
= output parameters
3.0
= output properties
4.0
UNITS
CODEUNIT
Indicates the summarize output units. Choices are:

CODEUNIT = Output summarize data in code units.
ACTIVE
= Output summarize data in active units.
F - 35
Appendix F.5.2
TOWER2 Code Bolt Strengths
Appendix F.5.2
Bolt TYPE and Associated Shear and Tensile Strengths
Bolt
Type
Shear
Strength (ksi)
Tensile
Strength (ksi)
A394
30.0
72.0
A307
30.0
60.0
A325
33.0
120.0
F - 37
Appendix F.6
NF83 Code PARAMETERS
Appendix F.6
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
CODE
Required

selection. Specify NF83 for code name. See Section 2.2.5.11 of
Volume 2B for a more detailed description.
TBLNAM
WSHAPES9 Identifies the table of profiles to be used during selection. See

Appendix E for other choices.
CODETOL
0.0

[1.0 + CODETOL/100].
PF
1.0

tension.
General
SFNORMAL 0.6
Safety factor for allowable normal stress:

Allowable = (SFNORMAL)(SY)(SF)
where:
SF = Stress increase factor (Section 2.5 of Volume 2A).
SY = Yield strength
SFSHEAR
Safety factor for allowable shear stress.

Allowable = (SFSHEAR)(SY)(SF)
0.4
Material Properties
SY
36.0(ksi)
Yield strength of steel at service temperature.
SU
58.0(ksi)
Minimum tensile strength of steel at service temperature.
REDE
1.0

REDFYLD.
F - 38
Appendix F.6
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
Slenderness Ratio
SLEND
0.0
SECNDARY NO
Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (KL/r) which differs from the

limitations of the ASME specification.
Indicates if a member is main (NO) or secondary (YES).
NO
= main member.
YES = secondary member.
K-Factors
COMPK
NO

YES = Compute KY and KZ factors. See the
COLUMN/BEAM LINE command (Section 2.4).
KY
= Compute KY only.
KZ
= Compute KZ only.
NO
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
SDSWAYY
YES

axis.
NO
SDSWAYZ
YES

axis.
NO
F - 39
Appendix F.6
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
GAY
Computed
G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAY is used in the calculation of effective length factor KY (see parameter COMPK, KY, and
GAZ
Computed
G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAZ is used in the calculation of effective length factor KZ (see parameter COMPK, KZ, and
GBY
Computed

calculation of effective length factor KY (see parameter COMPK, KY,
GBZ
Computed

calculation of effective length factor KZ (see parameter COMPK, KZ,
Buckling Length
LY
Computed
LZ
Computed
FRLY
1.0

computed.
FRLZ
1.0

Warping Restraint
WARP-END
PIN-PIN
WARP-END described the boundary condition of a member with

respect to warping restraint.
LWARP
Computed
Distance between end restraints as described in the WARP-END

parameter.
F - 40
Appendix F.6
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
Bending Stress
CB
Computed
Coefficient used in computing allowable compressive bending stress.
UNLCF
Computed
Unbraced length of the compression flange. Computed as length of

member.
FRUNLCF
1.0
Fractional form of the parameter UNLCF, allows unbraced length to

be specified as fractions of the total length. Used only when UNLCF
is computed.
Combined Stresses
AXEFF
0.0
Axial stress reduction factor indicating the amount of the axial stress
which is to be deducted from a corresponding bending stress acting
in the opposite direction.
CMY
Computed
Coefficient which modifies Y axis bending stress in interaction

equation.
CMZ
Computed
Coefficient which modifies Z axis bending stress in interaction

equation.
Force Limitation
FXMIN
0.5(lb)

FYMIN
0.5(lb)

FZMIN
0.5(lb)

MXMIN
20.0(in-lb)
Minimum torsional moment to be considered by the code.
MYMIN
20.0(in-lb)
Minimum Y-bending moment to be considered by the code; anything

less in magnitude is taken as zero.
F - 41
Appendix F.6
Parameter
Name
Default
Value

for More Detail)
MZMIN
20.0(in-lb)
Minimum Z-bending moment to be considered by the code; anything

less in magnitude is taken as zero.

SUMMARY
NO

explanation.
TRACE
4.0

explanation.
1.0
= never
2.0
= on failure
3.0
= all checks
4.0
VALUES
1.0

1.0
= no output
2.0
= output parameters
3.0
= output properties
4.0
F - 42
Notes
NOTES:
Notes - 1
Notes
NOTES:
Notes - 2
INDEX
INDEX
Absolute Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
ACI318-89 Design Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-109
Additional Input with Conventional GTSTRUDL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-47
ADDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
ALL POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-55
Analysis Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
ANALYZE and DESIGN Command for One-Way Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-87
AS BEAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
AS BEAM n1, or AS COLUMN n2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
AS COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
AS Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
AS TRUSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
ASD9 Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
ASTM Reinforcing Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Beam Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-93
Bound-Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33, 3-35

BOUNDARY ELEMENT
..................................................
3-60
BS449 Code
...........................................................
D-12
BS5950 Code
..........................................................
D-16
Canadian Standard Reinforcing Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
Channel Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-3
CHECK Command
......................................................
2-45
CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
CODE
2-11
................................................................
Column bending rigidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-102
COLUMN LINE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Column Output
........................................................
3-100
Column slenderness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65, 3-102

COMPK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-1
2-13
INDEX
CONSTANTS and Assumed Values for BSI BS8110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
CONSTANTS and Assumed Values for BSI CP110-72
..........................
3-16
CONSTANTS and Assumed Values for ACI 318-89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14
CONSTANTS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
Constrainable Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
Constraint-Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-22
CONTINUOUS MEMBERS list option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-83
Cover specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-66
Cracking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102, 3-104
CRITICAL LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57, 3-100

CRITICAL SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-53
CRITICAL SECTIONS ALL VALUES
........................................
2-55
CROSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Default value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
DELETIONS
...........................................................
2-10
DESIGN DATA for Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52
DESIGN DATA for Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53
DESIGN DATA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-51
DESIGN DATA for Flat Plates and Flat Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-54
DESIGN DATA for Joists ( One-Way Ribbed Slabs ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-56
DESIGN DATA for Monolithic Beam-Column Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-63
DESIGN DATA for Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-60
DESIGN DATA for Two-Way Solid Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-64
DESIGN LOAD Command
...............................................
3-107
Design Procedure Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-66
DETAIL Command
......................................................
3-81
Distance between Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
Distribute-Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Double Angles Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-6
EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
Element-Type-Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
I-2
INDEX
ELL
..................................................................
3-93
END OF DEFINITION Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-45
End-Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Examples of GTSTRUDL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3
FACE OF SUPPORT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-48
FCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
FCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
FLAT SLAB option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-41
FLEXURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-93
FLIST 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-66
FLIST 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-66
FLOOR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-39
FRACTIONAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
Frame Analysis and Member Proportioning
....................................
3-4
FTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-37
Fundamental Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
FYLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-37
...............................
3-5
GIRDER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27
GRID MEMBER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33
GRID DEFINITION Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30
GRID DEFINITION Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
GTSTRUDL System Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-67
GTTABLE
.............................................................
2-65
Batch Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-75
Creating a New Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
Creating a New Table From an Existing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-87
Displaying and Creating Tables of Steel Rolled Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-65
............................
2-68
...............................
2-66

I-3
.........................
2-89
INDEX
HOOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53
I Shape Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
I, Channel, Tee, & Structural Tubing Shape Properties
..........................
D-12
Individual Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
Interpretation of Reinforced Concrete Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-93
Introduction to Reinforced Concrete Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
JOINT DETAILS Command for Two-Way Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-72
JOIST types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-87
Korean Standard Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
Line-Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33, 3-35

List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-40
LL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Load-Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33, 38
Load duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-102
LRFD2 Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-10
MATERIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Member code checks
....................................................
2-46
Member constraint checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-46
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

MEMBER DIMENSIONS (Prismatic) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
MEMBER DIMENSIONS VARIABLE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
Member identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-100
MEMBER list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
Member selection
.......................................................
2-34
MEMBER SIMILARITIES Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-74
Member-Type-Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-51
METHOD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
NF83 Code
............................................................
D-20
Number of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
ONE WAY option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-41
I-4
INDEX
ONE WAY SLAB type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS Command
3-87
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Parameter-Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
PDELTA Analysis Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-102
PDELTA LOADING Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-106
Pipe Shapes
............................................................
D-7
Pipe Shape Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-13
Primary Bar Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-65
PRINT Commands for Steel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-60
PRINT CONSTRAINT CONDITIONS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-62
PRINT DESIGN DATA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-63
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-64
PRINT PARAMETER VALUES Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-61
PRINT REINFORCEMENT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-91
PRISMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 2-59

Profile Shape Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-26
........................................
3-79
Proportioning Reinforced Concrete Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-50
QUANTITY TAKEOFF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-92
RECTANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
RECTANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-93
Reinforced Concrete Design Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
ACI318-89 Design Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109

Additional Input with Conventional GTSTRUDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
ANALYZE and DESIGN Command for One-Way Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Beam Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Column Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
CONSTANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
DESIGN DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
I-5
INDEX
DESIGN DATA for Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
DESIGN DATA for Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
DESIGN DATA for Flat Plates and Flat Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
DESIGN DATA for Joists ( One-Way Ribbed Slabs ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
DESIGN DATA for Monolithic Beam-Column Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
DESIGN DATA for Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
DESIGN DATA for Two-Way Solid Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
DESIGN LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
END OF DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
FACE OF SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
FLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Frame Analysis and Member Proportioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Fundamental Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
GIRDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
GRID DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
GRID MEMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Hoops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Interpretation of Reinforced Concrete Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
JOINT DETAILS Command for Two-Way Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
MEMBER DIMENSIONS (PRISMATIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
MEMBER DIMENSIONS VARIABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
MEMBER SIMILARITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Orthogonal Buildings Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
PDELTA Analysis Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
PDELTA LOADING Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
I-6
INDEX
PRINT REINFORCEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
PROPORTION MEMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Proportioning Reinforced Concrete Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
QUANTITY TAKEOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
SEGMENT Command for Two-Way Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
SLAB SUPPORTS Command for Two-Way Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
SLENDERNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
WALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Reinforcing Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Reinforcement Yielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-102
Relational Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-27
RL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Secondary bar specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-66
SECTION Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
SECTIONS/ALL SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-55
SEGMENT Command for Two-Way Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-77
SEISMIC design
........................................................
3-84
SELECT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-34
SHEAR
3-93
...............................................................
Sidesway not prevented

Sidesway prevented
..................................................
2-14
.....................................................
2-14
Single Angle Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-4
SLAB SUPPORTS Command for Two-Way Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-69
Slenderness Effects for Columns

SLENDERNESS Command
..........................................
3-103
..............................................
3-103
Solid Round Bar Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-7
Spacing-Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Square and Rectangular Bar Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-8
Standard value
2-8
..........................................................
STANDARD CUTOFF option
..............................................
3-83
Start -Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

I-7
INDEX
Steel Design Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
ASD9 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 3

LRFD2 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 7
BS449 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 8
BS5950 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-10
TOWER2 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-11
NF83 Code Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-13
Steel Design Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

CHECK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-45
COLUMN LINE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
.........................
2-13
.......................................................
2-65
GTTABLE
Introduction to Steel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
MEMBER CONSTRAINTS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-22
PARAMETERS Command
PRINT Command
...........................................
2-7
.................................................
2-60
PRINT CONSTRAINT CONDITIONS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-62
PRINT DESIGN DATA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-63
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-64
PRINT PARAMETER VALUES Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-61
SECTION Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
SELECT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-34
Steel Design Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-90
STEEL TAKEOFF Command
........................................
2-58
SUMMARIZE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-51
TAKE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
Steel Design Example 1
..................................................
2-91
Steel Design Example 2
..................................................
2-97
Steel Design Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
STEEL DISTRIBUTION option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-79
STEELGRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
I-8
INDEX
STEEL TAKE OFF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-58
STIRRUPS
3-52
............................................................
Structural Tubing Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-9
SUMMARIZE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-51
TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-66
TAKE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
TBLNAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Tee Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-5
TEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
TIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53
TOWER2 Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-17
TRACE
2-36
...............................................................
TWO WAY option
.......................................................
3-41
UNESCO Reinforcing Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-57
USE CODE Option
......................................................
2-39
User Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-66
VARIABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-59
Variable-Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Version
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
VTMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
VTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
VU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
WALL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-43
WALLS
...............................................................
3-60
WITH DETAIL option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-80
I-9
INDEX
I - 10
Reader Comment Form
Reader Comment Form

Your comments can help the CASE Center improve its manuals and software. Please take
a little time to fill out this comment sheet. Tell us what you did or did not like about this document.
We will consider your suggestions as we continually review and update our software and user
documentation. Thank you.
Title:
GTSTRUDL User Guide: Design, Revision 5, April 2009
General Comments:
User Guide Organization:
User Guide Content:
Mail or FAX this sheet, or E-mail your comments, to:
COMPUTER AIDED STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CENTER

School of Civil and Environmental Engineering
Georgia Institute of Technology
Atlanta, Georgia 30332-0355 U.S.A.
Tel:
+1-404-8942260
FAX: +1-404-8948014
E-mail: casec@ce.gatech.edu
END OF DOCUMENT

Design Gtstrudl

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Design Gtstrudl

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

GT STRUDL

Integrated CAE System for

Revision 5, April 2009

GTSTRUDL User Guide: Design

First Edition describing steel and reinforced

Correction to calculation of G-factor for steel

Typographical error corrections, minor

A few command updates, typographical error

No changes have been made to this

No changes have been made to this

Restricted Rights Legend

STEEL DESIGN COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to Steel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GTTABLE: Displaying and Creating Tables of Steel Rolled Shapes . . . .

REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to Reinforced Concrete Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Proportioning Reinforced Concrete Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT REINFORCEMENT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Subset of GTSTRUDL Steel and Reinforced Concrete Design Commands

BS5950 Code PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to install and begin the execution of GTSTRUDL,

General philosophy and use of GTSTRUDL,

Examples of the use of GTSTRUDL, and

A concise description of a subset of GTSTRUDL commands.

Differences Between Steel and Reinforced Concrete

Format of the Descriptions of Commands in This Guide

Description of command elements: This section provides a brief description

Explanation: A general description of the purpose of the command is given.

ADDITIONS Mode: A detailed description of how the command operates in the

CHANGES Mode: A detailed description of how the command operates in the

DELETIONS Mode: A detailed description of how the command operates in the

Extended Examples: A more complete example of the use of the command is

Subset of GTSTRUDL Commands

GTSTRUDL Installation and Operations Guide, Release Guide, and

Describes the step-by-step procedure to install

For each new version of GTSTRUDL, the Release Guide

GTSTRUDL User Guide

Describes how to install GTSTRUDL on a Personal

GTSTRUDL User Guide

A condensed description of a subset of features from

GTSTRUDL User Guide

A condensed description of a subset of features from

GTSTRUDL, and describes how to initiate the execution of

Computer, how to initiate the execution of GTSTRUDL,

model generation, linear static and dynamic frame and

steel and reinforced concrete frame design.

GTSTRUDL User Reference Manual Documentation

Shows the POL command vocabulary and syntax

Characteristics of finite element structural models

Design of steel frame structures according to the latest

Design of steel frame structures according to the 13th

9th Edition AISC Steel Design Code for I-shape members

1986 AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Code with the 1989

Indian Standard IS:800-1984 Steel Design Code.

Design of steel frame structures according to previous

Finite element analysis

Design of reinforced concrete frame structures according

Data base exchange

SELOS (Sea Environment Load generation for OffShore

Offshore platform analysis and design.

GTTABLE User Manual

Description of all features of GT TABLE. GT TABLE is

Steel Base Plate Modeling, Analysis, and Analysis Result